SMI Version 8 User Guide

Information in this reference manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of any vendor. The software described in this reference manual is furnished under various license agreements and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of those agreements. Eagle Point has carefully prepared this program package, including research, development, and testing to ascertain its effectiveness and accuracy. However, no warranty of any kind is made with respect to this program package or its related material, except as may be expressly stated in the licensing agreement or other contractual document. In no event is Eagle Point liable for incidental or consequential damages in connection with, or arising out of, the furnishing, performance, or use of this program package. The installation program used to install SMI Version 8 software, InstallShield, is licensed software provided by Macrovision Corporation. SMI and Eagle Point logos are unregistered trademarks of Eagle Point. Allegro products referenced herein are either trademarks and/or service marks or registered trademarks and/or service marks of Juniper Systems, Inc. Geodimeter, Zeiss Elta, Nikon, and Trimble are registered trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited (Trimble). Javad, Topcon, HiPer Lite, and Legacy are registered trademarks of Topcon America Corporation (TAC), based in Paramus, NJ, it is the wholly-owned American subsidiary of Topcon Corporation of Japan. All other registered or unregistered trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Copyright 2004, by Eagle Point. All rights reserved.

SMI Version 8 User Guide

1
Getting Started..........................................................................................................9 Overview...................................................................................................................10
Manual Conventions ...................................................................................................................... 10 Previous Users of Versions 5, 6, or 7 ............................................................................................ 12 Driver/Instrument Changes ............................................................................................................ 13 Other Enhancements ..................................................................................................................... 14 Starting and Exiting SMI................................................................................................................. 30 Running Commands ...................................................................................................................... 30

Pocket SMI Interface ................................................................................................37

Command Bar ................................................................................................................................ 38 Command Tabs.............................................................................................................................. 38 Status Bar....................................................................................................................................... 39

Classic SMI Interface................................................................................................39

Classic SMI Menu Bar.................................................................................................................... 39 File Menu........................................................................................................................................ 40 Geoid Menu.................................................................................................................................... 45 Help Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 46

Data Display Area.....................................................................................................47 Soft Key Menu ..........................................................................................................47 Sidebar Menu Buttons ..............................................................................................48 Command Key Menu ................................................................................................49 Task Bar (Windows CE) ...........................................................................................50 Title Bar (Pocket PC) ................................................................................................50 Contacting SMI/Eagle Point......................................................................................51

Installation...............................................................................................................53 Installation Requirements .........................................................................................54 Authorizing SMI ........................................................................................................55 Before You Install SMI ..............................................................................................55
Migrating to SMI Version 8............................................................................................................. 55 Backing Up the Entire Job Listing .................................................................................................. 55 Un-Installing SMI V7.#x.................................................................................................................. 56

Installing SMI Using ActiveSync .............................................................................57

Working with Jobs..................................................................................................67

3

Creating a New Job ..................................................................................................68 Transferring a Job Using ActiveSync........................................................................70

Example ......................................................................................................................................... 71

Transferring a Job Using SMI Transfer.....................................................................72 Using an Existing Job ...............................................................................................74 Setting Up the Command Keys ................................................................................75
Adding a Command to the Command Keys Menu ........................................................................ 76

Installing a Geoid File ...............................................................................................78 Turning on the Geoid File Option..............................................................................78 Setting the Meters or Feet Option.............................................................................80

Data Collection .......................................................................................................81 Instrument Support ...................................................................................................82

Electronic Total Stations ................................................................................................................ 82 GPS Receivers............................................................................................................................... 83

Create a New Job .....................................................................................................83

Example ......................................................................................................................................... 84

Notes, Elevations, and Raw Data .............................................................................85

Note Sequencing............................................................................................................................ 87 Selecting Your Instrument.............................................................................................................. 88 Connect the Data Collector to Your Instrument ............................................................................. 89

Basic Surveying........................................................................................................90
Inputting Points Manually ............................................................................................................... 90 Copy JOB1 ................................................................................................................................... 108 View Coordinates ......................................................................................................................... 108 Inverse by Coordinates ................................................................................................................ 109

Electronic Data Entry ..............................................................................................110 Transformation .......................................................................................................111

Rotate to the State Plane Direction, Translate to the State Plane Coordinates, and Scale from Feet to Meters .............................................................................................................................. 111

Staking Points.........................................................................................................114 Working with Elevations..........................................................................................118

Store an Assumed Elevation at Point 3 ....................................................................................... 119 Use Benchmark............................................................................................................................ 120 One Optional Procedure for Trigonometric Leveling ................................................................... 121

Predetermined Area ...............................................................................................122

Hinge Method............................................................................................................................... 122 Slide Method ................................................................................................................................ 124

Sunshots.................................................................................................................125
4 SMI Version 8 User Guide

Setting Time within SMI ............................................................................................................... 126 How to Check the Current Time................................................................................................... 127 Determining Astronomic Azimuth................................................................................................. 127 Determining Grid Azimuth ............................................................................................................ 131

Stake to a Point ......................................................................................................134

Example ....................................................................................................................................... 135

Stake to a Line........................................................................................................138 Stake to a Curve Using the Stake Command .........................................................138 Stake to a Curve Using the Stake to a Curve Command........................................139 Stake to Points in the Random Points File..............................................................140
Staking Shortcuts Using Random Points ..................................................................................... 140

Staking by Station (STA) and Offsets .....................................................................142

Line Stakeout ............................................................................................................................... 143 Curve Stakeout ............................................................................................................................ 143

Multiple Sets of Angles to Multiple Points ...............................................................144

Multiple Angle Method 1............................................................................................................... 144 Multiple Angle Method 2............................................................................................................... 145

Shots Routine Using an Instrument ........................................................................146 Storing Elevations at Known North and East Points ...............................................149
Conditions Necessary to Use the STOEL Function..................................................................... 149 Free Station Resection Explanation............................................................................................. 151 Free Station Resection Example ................................................................................................. 152

Trial Run with Data Collection ................................................................................155

Printout of Your Data.................................................................................................................... 171 View Function............................................................................................................................... 172 Raw Data...................................................................................................................................... 172 Make a Backup Copy of Your Job ............................................................................................... 173 Adjusting Angles (Including Side Shots) ...................................................................................... 173 Making a Compass Rule Adjustment........................................................................................... 175 Computing Area ........................................................................................................................... 176 Rotating Coordinates ................................................................................................................... 178 Translating Coordinates ............................................................................................................... 181

Separate Distance and Angle .................................................................................184

Storing a Point Behind and to the Left of the Prism..................................................................... 186 Using ZHA to Store Multiple Points at an Offset or at a Distance Forward or Back .................... 187

Azimuth Surveying..................................................................................................189

Construction .........................................................................................................191 SMI Software Features and Examples ...................................................................192

Creating a Job.............................................................................................................................. 192 5

Traversing the Boundary from Point 1 to Point 7 ......................................................................... 193 Traverse to Point 1 Using the Inversed Distance......................................................................... 196 Find the Area, Perimeter, Square Feet, and Precision ................................................................ 197 Designing a Spiral with 5 as the Main PI ..................................................................................... 199 Entering Horizontal Control .......................................................................................................... 200 Check the New Tangent Lengths from Points 9 and 10 .............................................................. 201 Find the Station of Points 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8............................................................................... 202

Staking....................................................................................................................209
Stake a Point at Station 6+00 ...................................................................................................... 209 Staking Right of Way.................................................................................................................... 210 Staking the Centerline.................................................................................................................. 211 Staking a Point on an Offset and Incrementing ........................................................................... 213

Entering Vertical Control.........................................................................................213 Draw Vertical Control..............................................................................................217 Entering Templates ................................................................................................218 Draw the Template .................................................................................................221 Templates Uncommon.........................................................................................222
Templates with Curbs .................................................................................................................. 222 Cut Templates without a Fill Slope .............................................................................................. 223 Fill Templates without a Back Slope ............................................................................................ 224 Template with Ditch Bottom Example .......................................................................................... 225 Widening Example ....................................................................................................................... 225 Superelevation Example .............................................................................................................. 227 Interpolation Between Templates ................................................................................................ 229

Copy Templates to Other Side ...............................................................................230 Slope Staking .........................................................................................................231 Cutsheet Files.........................................................................................................237
Automatically Generating Cutsheet Files..................................................................................... 237

Spirals.....................................................................................................................238
Entering a Single Spiral................................................................................................................ 239 Entering a Spiral and an Arc ........................................................................................................ 240 Spiral Program ............................................................................................................................. 240

Robotic and GPS Functions ................................................................................243 Supported Robotic Equipment................................................................................244 Robotic Functions ...................................................................................................244
Auto Shots.................................................................................................................................... 244 Real-time Side Shot ..................................................................................................................... 245 Real-time Stakeout....................................................................................................................... 245 Rezero.......................................................................................................................................... 245

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Instrument Servo Positioning Screen........................................................................................... 245 Robot Servo Menu ....................................................................................................................... 246 Angle Turning............................................................................................................................... 246 Other Robotic Features................................................................................................................ 246

Notes About Using SMI with Robotic Total Stations ...............................................246 GPS Functions .......................................................................................................247
GPS Status Screen ...................................................................................................................... 247 GPS Average Shots ..................................................................................................................... 248

Guide to GPS ........................................................................................................251 How GPS Works.....................................................................................................252 How SMI Makes RTK GPS Easy............................................................................254 State Plane Conversion ..........................................................................................255
Currently Supported Projections .................................................................................................. 256

GPS Setup Using an Assumed Coordinate (Geodetic BS).....................................257 GPS Setup Using Two Known Points .....................................................................259
Occupy and Backsight ................................................................................................................. 259 Two-Point Free Station ................................................................................................................ 261

GPS Setup Using One Point and a Reference Angle .............................................264 GPS Setup Using State Plane Coordinates............................................................266 GPS Setup Using a State Plane Benchmark ..........................................................270
Accurate GPS Elevations............................................................................................................. 270

GPS Setup Using a Local Benchmark ....................................................................271 GPS Setup Using Multiple Rovers..........................................................................272
Setup Multiple Rovers (Macro)..................................................................................................... 272 Manual Method ............................................................................................................................ 273

GPS Setup Using an Independent Receiver...........................................................275

SMI Flex GPS WAAS Offset ........................................................................................................ 278 SMI Flex StarFire ITRF2000 Current EPOCH Offset .................................................................. 281

GPS Data Collection...............................................................................................286

Taking Side Shots ........................................................................................................................ 286 Side Shot Offset ........................................................................................................................... 286 Real-time Side Shots ................................................................................................................... 287

GPS Staking ...........................................................................................................288

Simple Point Staking .................................................................................................................... 288 Graphical Point Staking................................................................................................................ 289

Static Post Processing............................................................................................290

Closed Loop Network................................................................................................................... 291 Open Loop Network (Single Base Station) .................................................................................. 292

Collecting Static Data................................................................................................................... 293 Processing Static Data................................................................................................................. 295

Raw Data Generated by GPS Routines .................................................................309

Position......................................................................................................................................... 309 Average Position .......................................................................................................................... 309 Set Base Position......................................................................................................................... 309 Position Using NMEA LLQ and NMEA PJK................................................................................. 310

SMI Version 8 User Guide

GETTING STARTED
In this chapter: Overview..............................................................................10 Manual Conventions ............................................................10 Previous Users of Versions 5, 6, or 7 ..................................12 Driver/Instrument Changes..................................................13 Other Enhancements...........................................................14 Starting and Exiting SMI ......................................................30 Running Commands ............................................................30 Pocket SMI Interface ...........................................................37 Classic SMI Interface...........................................................39 Data Display Area................................................................47 Soft Key Menu .....................................................................47 Sidebar Menu Buttons .........................................................48 Command Key Menu ...........................................................49 Task Bar (Windows CE) ......................................................50 Title Bar (Pocket PC) ...........................................................50 Contacting SMI/Eagle Point.................................................51

CHAPTER

Overview

Figure 1-1 Allegro, JETT, Titan & Pocket PC

One of the strengths of SMI products has been to help you perform your work with the fewest keystrokes possible. SMI continues to build on this strength with the release of SMI Version 8. This release centers on the bulk of the functionality within the Classic SMI interface environment, which is very similar to the super-efficient RPL interface with which so many of you are already familiar. Additionally, you can easily create your own command shortcuts using the function/command keys on your data collector or by using the Command Favorites menu. Command Favorites is a customizable screen menu that puts your most commonly-used commands only two taps away.

Manual Conventions
This manual, as well as other Eagle Point user manuals, uses the following typeface conventions: Instance Module and Manual Names Section Names Format All Eagle Point products and manuals are italicized and in bold face (i.e., SMI, SMI Version 8, SMI Version 8 User Guide). When you are referred to another section in the manual, the section name will be italicized and the page number will be given (i.e., Introduction on page 1).

10

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Instance Data to Type in

Format If you need to type data into a field on the dialog box or on the command line, the information you are to type in shows as:

1234567890 AaBbCcDdEeFfGgHh
Prompts and Messages Prompts from the software and system messages are shown as:

Please select node #12345.

There are two types of notes used to draw your attention to important information in the manual. The following shows each type, with a description of each note. ! This is an FYI note. It will contain helpful hints and information that can increase your productivity or enhance the use of this module. # This is a warning note. Read these notes very carefully. Information important to successfully using this module will be included in these notes.

This is a flow box. This shows the steps to access the current command. MENU $ COMMAND

Commands that have a tool bar icon are labeled with ICON: followed by a picture of the icon. Dialog boxes have a table below them to describe the different options available on them. A sample is shown below. Option Current Menu New Icon Function This information indicates the menu that is currently being edited. Tap the triangle or press the up and down cursor keys while the current menu is selected to change to a different menu. Tap this button to create a new command menu.

11

Throughout this manual numerous references are made to various key types utilized by SMI. Below is a definition for each and the convention used to reference each in the documentation: Key Soft Keys Function These keys are called soft keys because their functions (and labels) change, depending on the menu selected. Soft keys are represented in this manual as white lettering on a black, rectangular background (i.e., <INST> soft key executes the SMI Instrument Menu command). A toggle key is a key whose function changes each time you press it. Any soft key in the display that has a square after it is a toggle key (i.e., <RAW> toggles the storage of raw data on and off). Hard key functions are imprinted on each key itself. The functions of these assigned keys are identified by the SMI surveying overlay that came with your SMI program. Hard keys are represented in this manual as black lettering on a gray, rectangular background (i.e., <SPACE> for the Space Bar key). Primary functions (or keys) are noted directly above each key on the SMI overlay. Primary keys are represented in this manual as black lettering on a white, rectangular background (i.e., <TRAV> executes the Traverse Shot command). Some special keys are called out use other conventions (i.e., the Enter key is represented with white lettering and a brown background !. This is also true for the a and c keys).

Toggle Keys

Hard Keys

Primary Keys

Special Keys

Previous Users of Versions 5, 6, or 7

This section lists and briefly discusses the enhancements of the SMI software since Version 5.

Enhancements from Version 5 to Version 6

The following is a list of new drivers/instruments supported: 12 (Robotic) Topcon RC-2 driver. (GTS 800 feature) Topcon DL100 Digital Level Topcon 800 I (for connecting directly to the Topcon 802A) Topcon GTS6 driver (same as GTS3) (Robotic) Topcon 800 A instrument supported. Topcon GMT-100 Zeiss Elta C20 and C30

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Zeiss DINI Electronic level Zeiss Elta S20/S10 Zeiss S20 interpreter in robotic cards. (Robotic) Georadio QL Zeiss radios supported (S20Q is the driver name) Leica NA2002 digital level Leica GSI16 MDL LaserAce 300 LaserCraft Rangefinder NMEA GPS GGA driver Trimble Optical Instruments (Robotic) Satel 3Asd and Satel 2Asx radios. PTS-V3 two way instruments.

Driver/Instrument Changes
(Robotic) G600 driver for the Geodimeter 600. Added several keys to the Custom Instrument Functions menu <FOLL> <DIST> <AIM> <FLW> <SOUN>. These options allow you to have greater control over what happens when the data collector is in Coarse mode. With <AIM> and <FLW> (follow) turned off and <DIST> set to track mode, a shot can be collected in 3 seconds compared to 12 seconds for a fine mode shot. See Geodimeter in the Instrument Reference section of the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information. Geodimeter driver GEO4 can now turn to the zenith angle in addition to the horizontal angle when turning to a point. (GPS) LLQ (Allen Osborne Associates) now works more like other GPS drivers with a live update function and GPS raw data. (GPS) Improved raw data for Javad, LLQ, and GGA drivers. (GPS) Javad and GGA drivers now allow quality of 0 for Base. Geodimeter 600 now follows the prism after taking Coarse mode shots. (Robotic) Topcon APL1-A now guarantees a new measurement on each shot. APL1A and 800 driver code separated. (Robotic) The Leica TCA1 driver now uses the same method of setting zero as the TCA2 driver. (Robotic) Added AIM in Coarse mode of CINST for Geodimeter 600 (G600). (Robotic) Leica TCA driver now leaves Lock mode on after performing a search. (Robotic) The Topcon APL and 800 drivers now sets the baud rate to 9600 when the driver is selected and not each time a instrument function is used. If the baud rate is changed manually

13

after the driver is selected, it will stay changed until a driver is selected again. To change the baud rate to 4800, turn on ALPHA mode, type in 4800, and press !. (Robotic) Shots in the reverse face are now supported in the G600 driver for the Geodimeter 600. The 600 cannot search while flopped, so the scope must be pointed at the prism when trying to get a flopped distance. (Robotic) The Topcon 800 (800) custom instrument menu now has the <SENS> key to adjust the sensitivity of the Topcon 800. Geodimeter 600 driver (G600) now does a compensator calibration every time the soft key <ON> is pressed. (Robotic) Added <HALF> toggle key in the instruments menu to allow Turbo 48s to control nonZeiss instruments at non-Turbo baud rates. Note that a baud rate of 1200 cannot be cut in half so a 1200 baud driver will run at 2400 baud on a Turbo 48 regardless of the setting of HALF. The Zeiss S20 and S20R drivers turn the HALF flag off so they always run at 19200 in a Turbo 48. Meters mode now supported on the Zeiss S20. Turn it on using <CHG> <NeXT> <MODE> <FEET> / <METR>. Added <LEVEL> key to the Zeiss menu. It shows how level the instrument is.

Other Enhancements
Improved note prompting for Level Notes. (GPS) Added REF3 button to second page of GPS menu. Using REF3 to add a third reference point creates a sloped plane model of the Geoid. If the Geiod entered in the GPS Options menu is not zero, the sloped plane model is not used. Multiple line comments in the raw data file now use CRLF instead of just LF. (GPS) Added <GEOID> button to <OPT> menu. (GPS) Benchmark (<BM>) now uses a special GPS routine when a GPS driver is selected. The difference in the elevation of the point and the measured position is applied to future points. Removed the submenus from the menu browser. (Robotic) Instrument Positioning menu (c <POS> ) now works faster and more like other menus. <LIVE> key now starts the live update instead of being a toggle key. Any key stops the live update. The a key must be pressed before using the arrow keys to move the instrument, just like other menus. The menu does not need to be exited to start new menu. Variables local to a job (such as scale) are now stored in a job variable structure that is stored on the card and cached in internal memory. SMI Version 8 User Guide

14

(Titan) Added more visible commands for F-key menus. (Robotic) If the distance entered for Real-time Sideshots (a SIDS ) is negative then you are prompted for storing the side shot when the distance from the last point is reached. This gives time to get the prism level before storing the shot. The ZHA comment record generated by the SDA command now stores the angle right instead of the azimuth. (GPS) Added routines for State plane to Lat/Long conversion. Cleaned up Screen Plot (<SPLOT>), Note Search (<NOTE>), and Transformation (<CX>) in the Random Points menu. Also cleaned up Angle Adjustments (<AERR>) and the instrument drivers installer. The <TIME> key in the Sunshots menu no longer accepts invalid. Note Table menu now has <PGUP> and <PGDN> keys instead of the USE key. Pressing ! is the same tapping <Use>. Added <TOPC> key to last page of <RPTS> menu. <TOPC> sends the points specified in the random points file. It uses the same protocol and flags as the KERMIT menu in the <JOBS> menu. Can be used instead of the <SEND> button in the KERMIT menu. The <DATE> key in the Sunshots menu no longer accepts invalid dates. Robotic instruments now search for prism after flopping. The data collector now prompts for an HI after a traverse if elevations are on and the HI is not 0. The prompt is not made until another key that uses the HI (such as <SIDS>) is pressed. The prompt is not made if the HI is entered before taking the next shot. This helps to make sure that a new HI is entered for every setup. Using the <HI> key works just as it has in the past. Assigned the new <SRVO> menu to the a 8 key. It is useful for controlling Servo-driven instruments. The menu keys are: <CLR> Clear modes of the instrument <CRS> / <FINE> Select Coarse or Fine mode. <LIGHT> - Toggle the stake light. <AZ> - Enter an azimuth or two points and the instrument will turn to that direction. <BRG> - Enter a bearing and the instrument will turn to that direction. <FS> - Toggle whether the instrument turns to the foresight.

(Robotic) In MBS, Trig, and Benchmark, the software guarantees that the instrument is in the correct face. If it is not it flops, the gun.

15

Added new option to Curve Stakeout (CURVE in STAKE or STA in Curve Menu). On the second page of the menu there is now a toggle key to choose between distance and offset from the Tangent (<TAN>) and from the Chord (<CHORD>). This is useful for some types of construction layout. Replaced the AZ/BRG/_RT/COOR key in the <STAKE> menu with <NXPT> (Next Point). If no point is on the stack, it searches the random points file for the closest point to the last shot and gives the go/come distance. If the point is on the stack, it gives the go/come distance to that point from the last shot. If two points are on the stack, it searches the range of points for closest and gives the go/come distance. Added <TCR> to the Sunshot menu for getting time, circle to sun, and results with one key press. The <SHOW> key was moved to the end of the second menu. Added Time Stamp toggle key to the <CHG> <INPUT> menu. When turned on, a time stamp is put in the raw data file every time a shot is taken. Visible Rectangular to Polar (R->P) & Polar To Rectangular (P->R) 2PFS (Resection) now puts calculated precision in raw data file. CVC Chain tangents can now be extended by any amount using the <XTND> key on the second page of the <OPT> submenu of <CONST> . The default value is 100. The HCCL must be recompiled before <XTND> has an effect. <SHOTS> now gets the zenith angle before taking a shot to determine if the instrument is flopped. In Manual mode, you are prompted for the direct or reverse. <SHOTS> now allows reverse shots at any time. <SHOTS> now allows a new point to be added to the point list at any time. If the next point is 0, you are prompted for the point number. Azimuth to Bearing (<ATB>) now displays bearing instead of putting it on the stack. Also displays azimuth, angle right, and deflection angle. MAN3 added to <INSTR> (Instruments). MAN3 prompts for coordinates instead of SD, ZA, HA. <POLE> / <INSTR> toggle added to the 2nd page of the Instrument Direction menu. The POLE option makes Left/Right directions from the perspective of the rodman.

16

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Enhancements from Version 6 to Version 7

The following is a list of driver or instrument changes: (GPS) Added NCTG driver to support the SMI Flex GPS system StarFire QuickStart function. Allows for sub-inch autonomous mode GPS for up to 20 minutes, after 20 minutes accuracy will always remain at 4" (decimeter) or better! Javad/Topcon GPS driver now uses a native Instrument Functions window. (GPS) NCT Instrument Functions menu now has buttons to turn the internal radio off (<+RAD>) and on (<-RAD>). (GPS) SMI Flex GPS internal radios are turned off when external radios are selected and on when internal radios are selected to extend the battery life of base and rover. With internal radios off, battery life should be 10 11 hours. (Robotic) Topcon 800 driver changes: Optical Communications mode can now re-zero, take reverse face shots and do auto shots. It ignores the arrow keys for turning the instrument and turning to a point commands because that stops the communications. Added option in the Topcon Instrument Functions menu ( <INFN> ) to toggle between using the distance mode on the instrument or having the data collector set it each time. This can make taking shots faster. (GPS) SMI Flex GPS now has the ability to send and receive CMR corrections. This provides compatibility with other brands of receivers. The CMR mode is prompted for if using external radios when BASE and ROVER are pressed. Added Topcon GPT driver for reflectorless use. GPT, GMT1 and 800 cable drivers can use the <PRISM> / <REFL> toggle in the <SRVO> and <INSTR> menus. (GPS) The SMI Flex GPS default baud rate is now 19200. In addition, baud rates as high as 115,200 baud are now supported on the Allegro CE and CX devices. (GPS) SMI Flex GPS Instrument Functions menu now has a <NETID> soft key to see and change the current Network ID. The <NETID> setting allows multiple bases to work in the same radio area without causing interference. (Robotic) Updated Geodimeter 600 and Trimble 5600 drivers for firmware newer than 1999. Instruments with older firmware may need to be updated. Made new Leica TC600 driver. 2400 baud Even parity, uses Distance mode on instrument. (Robotic) Topcon 800 optical communications driver changed so that instrument goes into standby mode when PAUSE key is pressed. 17

(DCE) Trimble 3600 driver now supports the 600 CU faceplate. Same driver as the Geodimeter G420 driver. (Robotic) Topcon 800 driver improved to support optical communications. This replaces the old 800, 800I, and RC2 drivers. Uses the new 800 driver when connected directly to the instrument instead of the GMT1 or GTS4 drivers. When the 800 driver is selected, it prompts with the appropriate connection options. Removed Leica REFL driver and OLDTC because TC, TCM, and TCA drivers now support the reflectorless toggle key in the <SRVO> and <INSTR> menus. Added <DIST> toggle key in the Leica TC, TCM, and TCA Instrument Functions menu (a <INFN> ). Toggles between having the data collector set the Distance mode each time a distance is taken and using the current distance on the instrument. (GPS) Ashtech RTK GPS drivers supported. (GPS) Javad/Topcon now has <OFF> soft key in the Instrument Functions (a <INFN> ) menu to turn off the receiver. Nikon NKN driver now supports <REFL> / <PRISM> and <LTON> / <LTOFF> toggles in the Instrument menu. (GPS) Released the new Leica GPS driver. (GPS) NavCom driver (NCT) now shows number of satellites tracked and used. (GPS) Leica GPS 500 driver {Leica} added to the <GPS> <INSTR> menu. (GPS) NavCom NCT2000 driver {NCT} added to the <GPS> <INSTR> menu. (Robotic) Geodimeter 600 (G600) improved to prevent old distances from being used. This added some time to Coarse mode shots. Every time you switch to Coarse mode, the Distance mode must be entered using the <DIST> soft key in the <INFN> menu. Taking the time to do this reduces the time every coarse shot takes. Current shot times are: Fine = 12 seconds; Coarse STD Distance mode with AIM & Follow off = 6 seconds; Coarse Track Distance mode with AIM & Follow off = 4 seconds. Added <TRIM> menu to the list of instrument drivers for selection of Trimble instruments. Drivers listed in the <TRIM> menu are: TTS For the original Trimble instruments same as the Lietz driver. 3300 Same as the Zeiss Elta R50 driver 3600 Same as the Zeiss ELTA C driver 5600 Same as the Geodimeter 600 driver (Robotic only)

18

SMI Version 8 User Guide

(Robotic) Both the Satel 3ASd and Satel 2ASx radios used by Topcon instruments are now supported. New soft keys <CH3AS> and <CH2AS> have replaced CHAN in the Topcon Custom Instrument menu. Added Topcon DL100 Digital Level driver.

Other Enhancements
Support for installation directly from Compact Flash cards Added commands GPS Receiver Logging, Start GPS Log On Receiver and Stop GPS Log On Receiver NavCom RTK and RTG Added GPS Static command key menu. Added HMS+, HMS-, +, -, *, /, and SQRT commands to the Trig Command Group. Added "Math Operators" and "Trig" Command Key menus. (GADOT) The GF (Grid Factor) routine for Georgia state plane zones now assumes meters when in Meter mode. It also prompts for points to use to calculate the grid and gives an option for storing the grid factor as the current scale factor. (GADOT) There is a new command to change the Georgia Next Available Chain - CHNNO. The command is Georgia Next Available Chain in the Survey Settings Command Group. (GPS) Added check to make sure the base routine has been run before allowing a coordinate conversion. Graphical Stakeout now displays Cut/Fill correctly for Landscape mode devices. (GPS) The <BASE> key no longer reinitializes the base point until after the first prompt. This prevents accidental tapping of <BASE> and losing the base point. New product created: SMI Allegro Windows PC Desktop. This product is available to all SMI users for a minimal fee. (GPS) Added <LBASE> key on the second page of the <GPS> <UTIL> menu. Prompts for Lat/Long/Height of base instead of getting it from the receiver. Using <LBASE> is a way to set up without having to use the <BASE> key when the base receiver is already transmitting corrections. Should be used with Local coordinate systems. Assumes you will also key in the correct occupied point and backsight angle using <OCPT> and <BKAZ>. (GPS) Added <SBASE> key on the second page of the <GPS> <UTIL> menu. Prompts for base point number. Using <SBASE> is a way to get set up without having to use the <BASE> key when the base receiver is already transmitting corrections. Should be used with State Plane coordinate systems.

19

Resetting the program via FILE > RESET CLASSIC SMI no longer sets the variables and flags back to their default settings. To clear variables and flags, use FILE > CLEAR CLASSIC SMI. ! When prompted to recover memory, always tap <NO>.

Command line can now be active when using F-Keys. Added support for the DPSTATUS command. (CVC) When a ditch distance of zero is keyed in the template editor, it is automatically changed to 0.0001 to prevent a divide by zero error. (GPS) When in GPS mode, north/south and east/west directions are shown in addition to go/come, left/right, and clock direction while staking. Added <REFL> / <PRISM> to the <ROBOT> menu and removed <CLR> because it is assigned to the keyboard. More functions made visible for use on F-Keys. (GPS) Local Inverse method now allows you to occupy a known point with the base. Tap <BASE> to key in the point number. Tap <BKPT> to key in a known backsight, occupy the back point with the rover, and tap <ZERO> to orient the horizontal angles. (GPS) Benchmark (<BM>) now supported in both the Local Inverse method and SPCS. (GPS) GPS manual entry option (<MAN5>) added to GPS instruments menu. Shot routines prompt for latitude, longitude, and altitude. (GPS) Angle only routines now work with Local GPS systems. (GPS) Changed <BASE> routine. If in SPCS mode, you must key in a known SPCS point the base is occupying. If in Local mode, you can key in a known local point and later key in a back point, or key in 0 and later perform a 2PFS. <SDA> improved so that the elevation of the first shot is not changed unless the second zenith angle shot is greater than 1 foot different than the first zenith angle. If the second zenith angle is different by more than 1 foot, the elevation is calculated using the second zenith angle and the horizontal distance of the first shot plus any horizontal distance adjustment entered. (CVC) Added ability to draw the template as modified by the <BNCH> routine. If there is a bench that is active when <DRAW> <TMPL> is pressed, you are asked whether to draw the template or bench. Remember that when taking shots when there is a bench, shots inside the shoulder will use the template and shots outside the shoulder will use the bench. Added FT2IN function. Key in decimal feet and get feet and inches to the nearest 16th on the stack. Feet, inches, numerator, and denominator on the stack in that order.

20

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The 12345 flags in the status area have been replaced with ORZNIM representing Overwrite mode, Raw data, Elevations, Notes, Instrument mode, and Meters mode respectively. (GPS) Graphical stakeout now takes height of rod into account. Support added for Geoid99 files.

Enhancements from Version 7 to Version 8

On the Allegro CE and CX we added F6-F10 key assignments (use the <BLUEKEY> prior to pressing the function key). Now all 6 soft keys can be mapped in addition to 4 other commands. F11 is mapped to About Classic SMI, F12 is mapped to Show Title Bar. ! Dont run SMI with the title bar on because it hides the function key mappings. SMI Transfer is now available from within Classic SMI on all devices (allows for ActiveSync Job Transfer (USB, COM), email of Job from field (using cell modem), and IR transfer of job in field between devices). IR Transfer requires utility supplied on the SMI Installation CD (License fee applies). 4000+ geographic coordinates systems (including NAD 27, HPGN, ITRF, and UTM). The Installation Wizard allows you to select a smaller list of coordinate systems so as to save room on the device and make the selection of a geographic coordinates system simpler. Support for complete coordinate system conversion using all the listed systems. Bluetooth support on most devices (officially supported on the IPAQ and Allegro data collectors). Support for Geoid 96, 99, 03, and all other USGS World Geoids. A new Geoid toggle command was added to the <GPS> <OPT> menu. The existing Geoid Departure command is now hidden if Use Geoid is on. Javad Set Radio Channel, Port, and Sensitivity commands are now available in the Setup command group. Static GPS Logging for SMI Flex GPS system now available in the GPS command group (you can also access this function by pressing <GPS> <NeXT> <LOG>. Javad and Topcon GPS Sky View is now supported. This includes support for the GLONASS satellite positions. The SMI Flex GPS Sky View has been enhanced to show the active WAAS satellite location, all satellites in sky, those in view, those being used for the current solution, an elevation (in your working units) and other helpful GPS information. 21

! The SMI Flex GPS system automatically disables unhealthy GPS satellites. The horizontal error for the SMI Flex GPS system is now correctly calculated when in RTK Quality 5. SMI Flex GPS now supports both RTCM and CMR formats for base and rover systems in addition to the proprietary NCT format. New Instrument Functions for SMI Flex GPS (Reset Receiver, Reset Ports, Network ID, Radio On, Radio Off, GGA On, GGA Off). The GGA on/off support for the SMI Flex GPS system allows it to be used with other NMEA type devices. 300 new favorites, function key commands and macros. This includes every HP Calculator command needed by surveyors and engineers. SMI Flex GPS Multiple Rover set has been simplified by using the new BI macro feature (11 key strokes down to 4). Direct driver support for StarFire's QuickStart Feature (autonomous sub-inch support). Accuracy drifts out to a maximum of 4" over about an hour. Total Station Scale factor now correctly calculated by GPS Base command. SMI Flex GPS now has RTK GPS under tree capability (5 L1 Signals must still be present). SMI Flex GPS (SF Models) can now run for 20 minutes with complete loss of RTK Corrections while still maintaining 2.5 cm or better accuracies. SMI Flex GPS automatically adjusts the satellite masking angle to obtain maximum accuracy and usability. A simplified/general overview of how it works is: Standard RTK 7d, long range RTK varies from 7d up to 15d, RTG (Backup of RTK and standard RTG) 5d. SMI Flex GPS now supports 115,200 baud instrument communications and up to 25 Hz positioning. Use StarUtil.exe Ports to configure the control port (com 2) to 115200 and use the Force Baud Rate setting in Classic SMI File > Settings. ! Rates faster than 5 Hz require an upgrade code from Eagle Point for 10 Hz or 25 Hz. These higher rates are useful in very dynamic environments (i.e., airplanes and vehicles). Set the navigation rate that you want to use using the StarUtil.exe > Rover command. A toggle was added to Classic SMI File > Settings to allow the SMI Flex GPS user control whether RTG Backup of RTK is considered Quality 5.

22

SMI Version 8 User Guide

! The HERR is now reported correctly, so this value may be a better control to use for actual positional accuracy determination. SMI Flex GPS now supports the Pacific Crest 35 Watt base and PDL rover system for increased range (requires an Allegro CX or Ipaq). These Pacific Crest PDL radios are also compatible with Topcon and Trimble's PDL radios and Trimble's TrimMark Radios when the SMI Flex GPS system is configured for RTCM or CMR. SMI Flex GPS now supports the use of 6 db Gain antennas with use of the new SSR Repeater radios for up to 2+ miles unlicensed range SSR Range. SMI Flex GPS now supports the Raven CDMA cell modems for RTK Communications. These cell modems can also be used in the field for remote synchronization and internet connection on the Allegro CE and CX devices. New windows interface for Classic SMI. Function key mappings are now touch active (Allegro and Titan devices). On screen buttons (i.e., NeXT , Graphical Stakeout , FAVorites , Soft keys 1-6, etc.) have larger intelligent touch areas making it easy to use the touch screen, even with gloves on. Support for color screens (numerous areas are now color coordinated) ALT (Left) and CTRL (Right) shift key indicators are now Red and Brown. F6-F10 function key mappings are blue to coordinate with the required blue shift key on the Allegro devices. Graphical Stakeout and Satellite View make full use of colors for easier identification. A new Note Sequencing program (could already be done with Eagle Points desktop Data Collection program). Allows for automatic changes to the default note. Did away with the COGO only version of the SMI program (base program is Data Collection (DC)). COGO can still be purchased in the version 7 variety for numerous devices, including the PC. A PC version of SMI Version 8 can be purchased for as little as $50 (instrument communication is disabled). Added the ability to run with both the internal and external radio systems to be used simultaneously (numerous advantages, light-weight rover local, use of SF units with RT units, etc.). The ability to turn on/off the internal radio at the base after it's configured is found in the <INFN> Menu. New SMI logo, desktop icons, and Windows desktop backgrounds.

23

Graphical Stakeout has improved icons with transparency. Version 8 does not run on the HP 48 platform. However, you can still buy version 7.1n cards for the HP 48. Contact SMI at (800) 678-6565 or (563) 556-8392. The soft keys are now lightly numbered for quicker identification (helps in identifying function keys which are mapped to the soft keys, and for support/training). Windows desktop versions have had all the field enhancements plus the ability to capture the classic screen (click in the upper left quadrant of the classic screen). The SMI logo displays, indicating that the image has been sent to the Windows Clipboard. ! Alt + Print Screen captures the entire application window.

Major Improvements to the documentation: Buttons are now searchable. Hundreds of additional commands have been documented. Documentation no longer references older HP 48 platform keystrokes. Only two manuals (User Guide and Reference Manual).

Enhancements within Version 8.0

Enhancements from Version 8.0h:
New Jettce Operating System: Two Technologies has updated the Jettce operating system to version 4.20.087. All Jettce units manufactured after May 26, 2005 are equipped with the operating system version 4.20.087. The Jettce operating system version 4.20.087 includes the following updates: 1. Fix for the hidden taskbar lockup at boot up. 2. Fix for the Bluetooth lockup from the device being suspended and restarted repeatedly. 3. Added "Sticky Key" functionality for Blue key. 4. Added the Transcriber program (handwriting recognition). If you have purchased a Jettce data collector prior to May 26, Eagle Point will be sending you an operating system upgrade. Eagle Point will follow up to assist you in the updating process of your data collector(s) or answer any questions you may have. Even though the process of updating users has already begun, it may be 30 before you receive your update. The Jettce data collector now produces audible cues when performing operations or errors occur.

24

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The Select Coordinate System dialog will now only display the coordinate system groups that are installed. The Installation will not install files for coordinate systems outside of North America unless the World option is chosen. The 2-corner, 3-corner and Point on Grade commands have been added to the Construction card. These commands will be available for the Construction, Construction with Robotic and DOT cards. Solid Earth Tide (SET) corrections will now be applied to a SMI Flex Starfire Base as well as a Starfire Rover. Added a new Quickstart command (QUIK) to the instrument function menu for the Starfire receivers. Running this command will not change any base parameters.

Fixed Issues from Version 8.0h:

The Settings command will immediately apply the changes for the Com port and baud rate. You will no long need to exit the software and restart for the changes to take place. Bluetooth communication lock up errors caused by being out of range or Bluetooth being unavailable have been corrected. In Command Favorites and Command Keys modifications will now get saved to the specified menu. In Command Favorites and Command Keys the Delete command will now permanently delete the specified menu from the list. Graphical Stakeout will now start shot requests for the Topcon Total Station instrument when the command opens. Speed improvements have been made for the Javad instrument driver. This reduces the time required to obtain a position for many commands.

Enhancements from Version 8.0g:

We have doubled the number of points that can be stored in a single storage file. If your device has sufficient room, you can change the storage file size to 4 MB. To do this go to File > Settings > Size of Storage File. This larger storage file size allows for storage of over 46,000 points depending on the SMI toggles like Elevation, Notes, and Raw. You will need to reset your device for this change to take effect. The maximum number of commands available in each "Command Favorites" menu has been increased to 50.

25

We added 15 additional commands to the default Command Favorites Calculator menu. On the SMI Jettce, the Random Points (RPTS) key will automatically set the ALPHA mode toggle on. This allows for quicker access to the Backspace function, which requires the ALPHA key to be active on the Jettce data collector. With either the NCT or NCTG driver active the new NMEA command is available under INFN (Instrument Functions Menu). This new function allows the SMI Flex GPS system to be used with NMEA compliant software programs. For example: ESRI's ArcPad and DeLorme mapping products. The current baud rate will remain unchanged (typically 19200) and will need to be verified in the NMEA software. Note: To return the SMI Flex GPS receiver to native mode for operation with the SMI software you will need to run the PORTS command also in INFN prior to selecting the ROVER command. The following NMEA messages will be made available to the NMEA compliant software: GGA On Change (from once a second to 25 times a second), GSA every 3 seconds, GSV every 2 seconds, RMC every 5 seconds, VTG every 4 seconds, Added the ability for the SMI Flex system to work as an RTK Rover with so called VRS networks (Virtual Reference Stations). These network RTK systems typically require a position from the rover prior to generating RTK corrections for the Rover. Select the new the GGA command in INFN to start outputting the NMEA GGA message to the radio/cell modem (data port) every 30 seconds. The INFN PORTS command will stop all NMEA messages when selected.

Fixed Issues from Version 8.0g:

The internal clock of SMI will synchronize its self with the data collectors BIOS clock when the device is woke up from suspend mode and when SMI starts. This resolves many time stamp related issues and allows for multiple sun shots to be performed in an 8-hour day possibly without exiting or resetting your clock. The on screen Geoid on/off toggle now displays its correct state after performing an install or running the Clear command. When performing NAD-27 to NAD-83 coordinate transformations you will no longer need to install the Alaska files.

Enhancements from Version 8.0f:

The new Jettce Desktop Emulator product was added to the SMI Product line. This product can be installed by selecting "Install SMI Version 8 to PC". The Desktop Emulators contain a majority of the features found in the real field products, allowing you to perform survey calculation in the

26

SMI Version 8 User Guide

office without having the actual data collector. These emulators are also a good training tool allowing multiple users to familiarize themselves with the product prior to be required to use the system in the field. Leica GPS receivers are now configured to use CMR corrections. This allows compatibility with SMI Flex GPS receivers using CMR corrections A new Leica GPS instrument function softkey of PDLCH was added, this allows SMI to set the Leica Pacific Crest PDL radio channel A new keyin of LCAPDLCH was added for the new Leica Change Channel command The Leica Change PDL Channel command was added to the GPS menu group Leica GPS receivers Graphical Stakeout will now update the position 5 times per second Two new macros were added to switch from GPS Rover to Total Station and back both found in GPS Command Group: Switch from GPS to TS & Switch from TS to GPS The SMI Flex GPS Start/Stop button now function properly in the GPS Static Logging Dialog The SMI Flex LOG softkey in the GPS NeXT menu now starts the GPS Static Logging Dialog The SMI Flex ITRF displacement vectors are now applied to the new Solid Earth Tide (SET) RTG navigation modes

Fixed Issues from Version 8.0f:

SMI Jettce +/- key now runs the correct change sign function in all cases Graphical Stakeout cut/fill will now display in the current unit when in State Plane GPS diagnostics now displays the NavCom firmware version installed on the connected NavCom receiver.

Fixed Issues from Version 8.0e:

The problem where pressing the ESC key within GPS multiple times unloaded the SMI product has been fixed.

Enhancements from Version 8.0d

SMI has developed a new data collector aimed to satisfy SMI users wanting to upgrade to our new windows platform but desire a lower cost solution to the Allegro data collector. Key features of the SMI Jettce include: Custom Keyboard / Overlay which closely resembles the HP 48 layout, 27

10 Custom Command Keys, Color QVGA Touch Screen, 10 Hour Runtime, Optional Bluetooth Communications, 64 MB Ram and 64 MB Built-in Storage, Support for the new NavCom 3.0.4 firmware. Version 8 will continue to support 2.23.x and previously supported firmware. All SMI Flex StarFire GPS Systems now have RTK Extend - Combines the capabilities of the StarFire global decimeter positioning system with RTK to overcome the problem of communication dropouts. The RTK Extend feature overcomes this problem by continuously computing both RTK and StarFire solutions. During periods of successful RTK operation, the system keeps the back-up StarFire solution locked to the RTK solution until needed. If the receiver loses communication with the base station, it continues to output and position with RTK accuracy using the StarFire solution for up to 20 minutes. Once the communication link is restored, the system automatically switches back to the RTK solution. All SMI Flex GPS Systems now have SureNav - Intelligently evaluates all combinations of single or dual frequency, 2D or 3D, type of corrections available including DGPS, WAAS/EGNOS, StarFire and RTK to select which of the 16 different operating modes will optimize performance. SureNav constantly evaluates navigation mode selection and smoothly transitions between navigation modes as appropriate. This decreases outage time in marginal signal conditions by combining single frequency and dual frequency measurements. SMI Flex GPS StarFire systems now use Solid Earth Tide corrections - The RTG positions are now adjusted for the effects of solid earth tides real-time. The system now models the effects of solid earth tides and automatically corrects the positions output by the receiver to remove the effects of solid earth tides on elevations. SMI Flex GPS has Improved RTK Performance - Ability to process multi-hertz CMR corrections at the rover. Corrected compatibility issues when broadcasting CMR & RTCM corrections for use with other manufacturers receivers. Improved ambiguity resolution at longer ranges. SMI Flex now has Improved Satellite acquisition - More reliable satellite acquisition in poor signal conditions. SMI Flex Backpack modes have Internal data logging enhancements - If active, internal data logging will automatically resume following a power fail, or when the operator powers the unit off and on. We changed SMI Flex Base Station RTCM RTK Corrections Messages to 18/19 rather then 20/21 to allow for a larger list of manufacturers to be capable of receiving corrections from an SMI Flex Base. NCT and NCTG Drivers automatically detect Starfire receivers and don't prompt for internal radios. SMI Version 8 User Guide

28

More values are saved to RAM allowing the receivers to power up in the exact same state they were when powered off.

Fixed Issues from Version 8.0d:

GEO 600 and Trimble 5600 Graphical Stakeout will now acquire first shot. GEO 600 and Trimble 5600 Graphical Stakeout shot update have been updated to 1 second vs. 10 seconds. When in a Local Coordinate System, long-range East/West distances in Graphical Stakeout were off by the SMI Earth Curvature Correction. This has been resolved. The slow communication issue after the device goes to sleep especially noticeable with Bluetooth has been resolved. This affected all instrument drivers causing slower operation of the device. An issue that caused SMI Transfer to timeout with DOT Versions has been resolved. FSPT from the staking menu and FSPT from the Construction menu were being swapped when used as custom command keys. These command are now referred to as FSPTC for Construction and FSPT for standard staking. Numerous other Custom Command Keys display names were updated to avoid confusion with similarly named commands, See Reference Manual for a complete revised listing of commands and key-ins. Juniper Systems has updated the Allegro CX Operating System to version 1.04. All Allegro CXs repaired and manufactured after December 21, 2004 are equipped with the operating system version 1.04. The Allegro CX Operating System Version 1.04 includes the following updates: 1. 2. Improves IrDA connectivity and speed has been dramatically improved through higher voltage. Memory Leak: The memory leak only occurred on monochrome units. The problem occurred during the process when the Allegro periodically checks the status of the display heater. In previous versions of the operating system every time this process ran, a small amount of RAM memory was used. After prolonged use, the RAM memory becomes depleted; this phenomenon is known as a memory leak. Implements Microsoft QFE 040409_KB838793 regarding Microsoft ActiveSync file synchronization. File Synchronization using ActiveSync: Microsoft ActiveSync on CE .NET 4.2 was corrected so that desktop files that were previously synchronized with the handheld were not erroneously deleted from the desktop PC during the next synchronization with the handheld.

3.

For more information see Upgrading the Allegro CX Operating System

29

Starting and Exiting SMI

Tap the SMI icon in the lower right corner of the display to start Classic SMI. Another way to start SMI is to select Start > Programs > Classic SMI or Start > Programs > Pocket SMI. Both interfaces are available, regardless of which one you pick. To switch to Classic SMI from Pocket SMI, tap the data collector icon in the upper left-hand corner of the Pocket SMI screen. To switch to Pocket SMI from Classic SMI, tap the data collector icon in the lower right-hand corner of the Classic SMI screen. You can also assign the Switch Interfaces command to a command button, command favorite, or the command bar. To exit the program from the Pocket SMI interface, tap the Exit button on the Job tab. To exit from the Classic SMI interface, select File > Exit. Both interfaces are closed when either one is closed.

Running Commands
Most commands can be run using several different methods. This section describes each of these methods.

Data Collector Overlay

It is important to note that the functions printed on the overlay on the Allegro, JETT, and Titan data collectors refer to the SMI program. This means that if you are in a program other than SMI, you need to switch to SMI to use these functions.

30

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 1-2 Allegro Overlay

JETT Overlay

Titan Overlay

! Important Documentation Note: As you can see in the above figures, the a and c keys are opposite on the Titan. Because the Allegro and JETT collectors are the current and primary data collectors for SMI, in the remainder of this manual, if you are using a Titan you must consider the a and c buttons to be opposite. For example, if the manual says to press a <SPACE> for INFN, you actually have to press c <SPACE> (SP) button on the Titan. For the following Overlay Explanation, however, the keys are correct for both the Allegro and Titan data collectors.

Overlay Explanation
Name, Key, or Label Back Light Toggle Contrast Down Contrast Up LT RT Allegro Key <GOLDKEY> F3 <GOLDKEY> F4 <GOLDKEY> F5 a7 c7 JETT Key <BLUEKEY> F1 & F2
N/A (color only) N/A (color only) N/A N/A

Titan Key <BLUEKEY> F3 <BLUEKEY> F4 <BLUEKEY> F5 c7 a7

Description Activates back light Adjusts contrast down Adjusts contrast up Angle left Angle right 31

Name, Key, or Label SRVO CLR (AKA PAUSE) TOPT SRCH INFN POS NOTE NW INST RSIDS CDIR HAZA FLOP LGT FINE ATB RAW

Allegro Key a8 c8 a9 c9 a Esc c Esc a4 c4 a5 c5 a6 c6 a BkSp c BkSp a1 c1 a2

JETT Key T R aG cG aJ cJ aK c4 c6 cM
N/A

Titan Key c8 a8 c9 a9 c SP a SP c4 a4 c5 a5 c6 a6 c BKSP a BKSP c1 a1 c2

Description Servo menu Clear instrument Turn to point Search Custom Instrument menu Instrument Positioning menu Key in note NW bearing to azimuth Instrument toggle Real-time side shots Compass direction Turn to horizontal and zenith angle Flop instrument Guidance light toggle Toggle Fine/Coarse Mode Azimuth to bearing Toggle Raw Data on/off

cK aH cH a1 c5 a2

32

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Name, Key, or Label SE EL SW FAP NEXTNO RE-0 ZERO TURN

Allegro Key c2 a3 c3 a! c! a0 c0 Arrows on the large navigation button

JETT Key c2 a3 c1 a! c! a0 c0 Either the: a R, S, T, and O or <BLUEKEY> R, S, T, and O. Y c.

Titan Key a2 c3 a3 c! a! c0 a0 Turn instrument or move cursor

Description SE bearing to azimuth Toggle Elevations on/off SW bearing to azimuth First available point Key in next number Turn to backsight and zero again Zero instrument Pocket PC:

+/RTN

a. c.

<BLUEKEY> ESC a.

Change sign Return (allows text to continue on the next line) Windows START Button Return to the previous soft key menu Advance to the next soft key menu Perform SHIFT LEFT 33

START PREVIOUS NeXT Left Shift

<BLUEKEY> Start < TAB TAB > a (Red)

c0 aL L a (Purple)

N/A N/A N/A c (Red)

Name, Key, or Label

Allegro Key

JETT Key

Titan Key

Description functions

JOB CHG VIEW Right Shift BKPT OCCUPY SETUP BMRK 2PFS CONST SIDS TRAV SDA SHOTS TRIG STAKE STO PT CURVE

A B C c (Brown) D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

I W V c (Teal) cU cQ J aV cZ Q M P aY cT c8 S K aU

A B C a (Brown) E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R

Jobs menu Change menu View menu Perform SHIFT RIGHT functions Key in back point Key in occupied point Setup menu Benchmark Two-Point Free Station Construction menu Side shot Traverse Separate distance and angle Shots menu Trig leveling Stake menu Store coordinates Curves menu

34

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Name, Key, or Label X RPTS MORE PT-PT PRINT DELETE CUSTOM MENU GPS GSTK ALPHA SELECT FAV SWITCH ON/OFF

Allegro Key R S T U V W X Y Z _ Ins a SPACEBAR SPACEBAR c SPACEBAR On/Off

JETT Key U N O X
N/A

Titan Key S T U V D W X Y Z
N/A

Description Intersections menus Random points More menu Point to point traverse Print menu Delete menu Custom menu Command Keys Menu GPS menu Graphical Stakeout

DEL
N/A

a Esc Z
N/A

ALPHA cI aI
N/A N/A

(up arrow)

Toggle Alpha Mode Select Command Favorites menu Command Favorites Switch User Interface Toggles the Device on and off

N/A N/A

On/Off

F1 / <BLUEKEY> F1

Command Favorites
Command Favorites allows you to select from a list of commands. There are several predefined menus (lists of commands) you can use to create menus of your favorite commands. The Command Favorites dialog box is displayed by pressing the Spacebar key at the bottom of the Allegro, pressing and releasing the Alt key then pressing the I key on the JETT, or by pressing the SP key on the Titan. 35

The <FAVorites> button in the Setup tab of the Pocket SMI interface window also starts the Command Favorites dialog box. Assigning the Command Favorites command to a command key or command bar button allows you to run it from there as well. Tap the command in the list of commands that you want to run. If you prefer not to use the touch screen, use the up and down arrows on the Navigation button and press ! to run the selected command.

Figure 1-3 Command Favorites Dialog Box

36

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Pocket SMI Interface

Figure 1-4 Vertical and Horizontal Pocket Screen Captures

If you have not used SMI software on the HP 48, you may want to start with the Pocket SMI user interface until you feel more comfortable with the very efficient Classic SMI interface. The Pocket SMI interface offers the easy-to-learn organization of tabs and large buttons. There is more room on the buttons to show the function name instead of the five-letter abbreviation required for the Classic SMI keyboard overlay and soft keys. Nearly all the commands started from the Pocket SMI interface actually run in the Classic SMI window. Getting to any function is as easy as two taps one to select the tab for the general category of function and another tap to select the button to start the function. You may also customize commands using the Pocket SMI command bar. See Command Bar on page 38 for more information. The Pocket SMI touch screen is divided into three different areas: Command Bar Command Tabs Status Bar

37

Command Bar
At the top of the Pocket SMI interface is a row of ten buttons called the command bar.

Figure 1-5 Command Bar

ICON: The first button is a data collector icon (above) that, when tapped, switches to the Classic SMI interface. ICON: The buttons labeled 1 through 8 can be assigned to any command. To change the command assignments on the 1-8 buttons, tap on the Select a Command Bar Menu icon (above). It opens the Select Command Bar Menu window. Tap on the command bar menu you want to use and it is immediately assigned to the command bar. A disadvantage of this SMI interface is that you cannot see what command is assigned to each button unless you tap the Select Command Bar Menu icon. It is also necessary to use the touch screen. The Customize button in the Select Command Bar Menu opens the Customize Command Bar window. See Customize Command Bar for more information.

Command Tabs
The command tabs enable access to the major Pocket SMI commands. The commands are organized by topic. Tap on the tab to see the buttons related to that tab.

Figure 1-6 Command Tabs

Refer to the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information about particular commands. 38

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Status Bar
The status bar shows the current job, backsight point, occupied point, foresight point, or last point stored, and the soft input panel shortcut. Any of these settings can be changed by tapping on the status bar.

Figure 1-7 Status Bar

Classic SMI Interface

The Classic SMI program interface looks and works much the same way that SMI did on the HP 48. With some additional touch screen enhancements.

Figure 1-8 Classic SMI Interface

If you are familiar with using SMI on the HP 48, you will appreciate its likeness with Classic SMI, as this allows you to get up and running quickly without having to learn many new screens or menus.

Classic SMI Menu Bar

The Classic SMI menu bar contains the File, Transfer, Geoid, and Help menu options.

Figure 1-9 Classic SMI Menu Bar

39

File Menu

Figure 1-10 File Menu

Storage Files
When you start using SMI, you are using the storage file that is stored within the program itself. To copy your current job information in SMI to a separate storage file, use the Backup Storage File command. The current storage file then retains all of the current job data within the program. To clear out the current storage file and start from scratch, select the New Storage File command. Here you are prompted to save your current job list to a separate storage file. Give this file a name, select a location, and tap OK. The result is a storage file in the program that only has JOB1 in the list of jobs. You can also save the current job information that you have to a separate storage file and create a new file to upload all the new project data from a PC to SMI in the new, empty storage file. To switch to a different job list, simply choose the Restore Storage File command, save your current job list (if desired), and select a storage file from the list. It is always recommended that you use the non-volatile storage area to store your data. This built-in nonvolatile storage card would be a good place to store information because it is not dependent upon the data collector's battery. On the data collector, the internal storage area is labeled something like \C_Drive or \StorageCard . This internal storage location exists so that you have the option to save your storage files here in lieu of an external storage card. # The use of a storage card storage device is highly recommended over saving information to the main memory location on the device. A reset causes you to not only reinstall the SMI software, but also deletes any job data not already downloaded to your PC.

40

SMI Version 8 User Guide

New Storage File

FILE $ NEW STORAGE FILE The New Storage File command allows you to create a file which can be up to 2 MB in size. You can have as many storage files as your free space allows. After selecting this command, you are prompted to save the existing storage file. Key in the name of the file and select the folder in which to save the file. Tap OK. If you cancel while saving the storage file, the entire operation will be canceled and a new storage file will not be created. This is done to prevent accidental loss of data.

Figure 1-11 New Storage File Screen

Restore Storage File

FILE $ RESTORE STORAGE FILE This command allows you to reload the storage file that was previously stored.

41

Backup Storage File

FILE $ BACKUP STORAGE FILE The Backup Storage File command saves the current virtual RAM card to a file on the data collector. This allows you to save up to 2 MB of job information of this virtual RAM card to a separate location on the data collector to be accessed later. See New Storage File on page 41 for information on where to save the file. Each virtual card file may take up to 4 MB of space on the data collector. Be aware of how much room is available on the storage device prior to creating a backup storage file on the device as this may adversely affect the performance of the device.

Customize Command Keys

FILE $ CUSTOMIZE COMMAND KEYS This command enables the creation and editing of menus of commands that can be assigned to the command keys. Changes are saved as they are made.

Figure 1-12 Customize Command Keys Dialog Box Customize Command Keys Dialog Box Definitions
Option Current Menu New Icon Function Indicates the menu that is currently being edited. Click on the drop list or press the up and down cursor keys while the current menu is selected to change to a different menu. Creates a new command menu.

42

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Option Delete Add Remove Up Arrow Down Arrow OK

Icon

Function Deletes the current menu. Adds a new command to the current menu. Removes the selected command from the list of commands. Moves the selected command up in the list of commands. Moves the selected command down in the list of commands. Closes the window.

Settings
FILE $ SETTINGS This command allows you to change the communication settings for the SMI software to match those of the data collector/instrument.

Figure 1-13 Settings Dialog Box

43

Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Authentic 48 Speed Function By default, this setting is off, as the program actually runs slower when toggled on. If this option is toggled on, Classic SMI matches the speed of the HP 48. This is generally only useful for performing sun shots where very accurate clock information is required. Allows you to choose the size of the data file being used by Classic SMI. The data file is used to store all the jobs in current use. You can select from the following sizes: 256K, 512K, 1M, and 2M. A larger storage file size allows you to store more data (more points). By default, this setting is set to COM 1. This option allows you to select which serial port on the unit is used for communications. Toggle on this option if you want to override the default baud rates used when communicating with an instrument or the PC. SMI Transfer also has an option on the Settings tab to force the baud rate. Forcing the baud rate in both Classic SMI and SMI Transfer allows baud rates as high as 115200 to be used. Setting this option correctly is important for being able to communicate. If this option is toggled on, the RTS serial port line is enabled. Communicating with devices that require hardware flow control is not possible unless this option is turned on. Most devices do not require hardware flow control. This option contains a number of SMI Flex GPS StarFire type functions: RTK Extend (RTG Backup of RTK is Quality 5 otherwise it is Quality 4), ITRF Displacement Vectors, and QuickStart Values.

Size of Storage File

Wire Force baud rate to

Flow Control StarFire

Clear Classic SMI

FILE $ CLEAR CLASSIC SMI This command clears the current settings of the Classic SMI interface. You will not lose any job data. It is the similar to pressing ON + A + F on an HP 48. When prompted Try to recover memory, always tap <NO>.

44

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Reset Classic SMI

FILE $ RESET CLASSIC SMI This command can be used to recover from program problems. It is similar to pressing the reset switch under the rubber foot of the HP 48.

Exit
FILE $ EXIT This command properly exits the program. It is not necessary to exit the program when turning off the data collector. However, SMI should be closed using this menu item before installing a new version of SMI or performing a soft or hard reset on the data collector.

Geoid Menu

Figure 1-14 Geoid Menu

Use Geoid
GEOID $ USE GEOID This command allows you to correct GPS heights reported by GPS receivers using Geoid files. The option is on when a checkmark appears next to the menu item. A Geoid file for your area can be downloaded using SMI Transfer 7. Geoid files for the United States and the entire world are on the SMI Installation CD. If the Use Geoid menu item is turned on and there are no files for the location being surveyed, a warning box displays and the Use Geoid menu item is turned off. For more information on the use and advantages of Geoids see the other Geoid topics in this user guide and the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual.

45

Help Menu

Figure 1-15 Help Menu

Re-Authorize
HELP $ RE-AUTHORIZE When you tap this option, you are prompted for a new password to change the software authorization (e.g., to key in a permanent authorization code over a temporary code). You may also need to reauthorize in the event the data collector was reset to factory defaults. If you receive an authorization code from Eagle Point, please save this code. These codes never change for a device. So an authorization code that you receive today will be good for reauthorizing the device a year from now.

Figure 1-16 Re-Authorize Dialog Box

About Classic SMI

HELP $ ABOUT CLASSIC SMI This command displays the software version number, copyright information, and device serial numbers.

46

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Data Display Area

The Classic SMI data display is between the title bar and the soft key menu. It looks very similar to the screen of the HP 48. It is not touch sensitive (except on the Windows Desktop version which produces a screen capture of the Classic SMI area to the Windows Clipboard).

Figure 1-17 Classic SMI Display Area

This screen is intentionally black on white for optimal visibility outside.

Soft Key Menu

The soft key menu is located between the Classic SMI display and the command keys. These touchsensitive keys are usually black with white letters. The commands shown on the buttons change to show the current options available. If there are more than six soft keys in the current menu, tapping the <NeXT> button on the sidebar menu displays the next six soft keys. The six soft keys can be assigned as commands to command keys or command favorites. They are located in the Program Settings command group. See the Customize Command Keys section in the SMI User Guide and Reference Manual. ! The <NeXT> and Previous soft key menu functions are also on the Allegro keyboard:

Figure 1-18 Soft Keys

! There is also a small amount of touch screen room above and below these keys that will also activate them, allowing you to access these keys on small touch screen devices with your fingers.

47

Sidebar Menu Buttons

Figure 1-19 Sidebar Menu Buttons

Displays the four most common commands you will use in the Classic SMI interface on a touch screen device.

Sidebar Menu Button Definitions

Option <Esc> Function Denotes Escape or Cancel. This command is similar to using the ON/CANCEL button on the HP 48. When you are in the middle of a command and you want to cancel out of the operation, press <Esc> . Some commands require you to press <Esc> <Esc> twice (once to stop the operation and a second time to cancel entering data and go back one screen not canceling the function necessarily). In certain commands, tapping the <Esc> button clears data on the command line. ! The Esc key on the devices keyboard also performs the same function as the <Esc> screen button. <FAVorites> Displays the Command Favorites menu. The menu that displays may be customized, or you can create your own. These commands are accessed either by tapping on the screen or using the Navigation button (large round key Allegro & IPAQ, large + key Titan, or on the JETT the <BLUEKEY> and R, S, T and O) and the ! key. See Command Favorites on page 35 for more information on the Command Favorites menu.

48

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Option <Graphical Stakeout>

Function Provides you with real-time go/come, left/right staking information with a map display to show you your relative location to a point being staked. You must have an instrument driver selected for this command to work properly. For more information on this command, refer to the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual.

<NeXT>

Advances the soft key menu if there is more than one soft key menu for the current command. This button works just like the NXT key on the HP 48. ! The Right Tab key on the Allegro device <TAB >> also performs this same function.

Command Key Menu

The command key menu is between the soft key menu and the task bar. It shows the abbreviated names of the commands assigned to the command keys. The command keys are keys F1 through F10 located immediately below the display. The command key menu is touch sensitive just like the soft keys.

Figure 1-20 Command Key Menu (Allegro, JETT and Titan)

# By default, the task bar is always displayed and covering the F6-F10 command key assignments on the Allegro and JETT devices. Click on Start > Settings > Taskbar and turn on the Auto Hide toggle. When the task bar is in Auto Hide mode, simply click on the very bottom of the touch display to view it (on the Allegro you can also press the <BLUEKEY> and <Start> (next to !)).

Figure 1-21 Start Key (Allegro & JETT)

! The Titan only supports F1 F5. You will not see the F6 F10 area for that device and therefore there is no reason to turn on the Auto Hide feature on the DAP Titan data collector.

49

Task Bar (Windows CE)

The Start button and the system tray icons display at the bottom while SMI is running. This entire bottom portion is called the Windows task bar. Refer to your data collector documentation for more information about the task bar or system tray. (To hide this task bar in order to see all of the command key functions on the Allegro and JETT devices, go to Start > Settings > Taskbar and toggle on Auto Hide).

Figure 1-22 Task Bar

Title Bar (Pocket PC)

At the top of the Pocket SMI display, the Start icon, Classic SMI version, and time are shown. This area is called the title bar. Tapping on the Start icon displays the Start menu.

Figure 1-23 Title Bar

50

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Contacting SMI/Eagle Point

Eagle Point 4131 Westmark Drive Dubuque, IA 52002-2627 (563) 556-8392 Main Office (800) 678-6565 Main Office Toll Free (800) 477-0909 Support Number (563) 556-5321 Fax Number Normal business hours are 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM CST., Monday through Friday authcodes@eaglepoint.com - Authorization Codes Request ftp@eaglepoint.com - Help with the SMI and Eagle Point FTP sites sales@eaglepoint.com - Eagle Point Relationship Building Department support@eaglepoint.com - Eagle Point Product Support webmaster@eaglepoint.com - Eagle Point Webmaster http://www.eaglepoint.com - Eagle Point website http://www.smi.com - SMI Field Survey Solutions website

51

2 INSTALLATION
In this chapter: Installation Requirements....................................................54 Authorizing SMI ...................................................................55 Before You Install SMI.........................................................55 Installing SMI Using ActiveSync .......................................57

CHAPTER

53

Congratulations on your purchase of SMI. As computing devices continue to become more rugged and powerful, great opportunities are opening up for field data collection. We are working to make those opportunities fully available to the land surveying professional. In this document, PC refers to a desktop PC/laptop. Allegro refers to the Allegro CE or CX by Juniper Systems. JETT refers to the SMI JETT collector built by Two Technologies for SMI. Pocket PC refers to a mobile personal data assistant (PDA) such as Hewlett Packard's (Compaq) IPAQ.

Installation Requirements
Desktop Computer Requirements A PC successfully running Microsoft Windows 98, ME, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP. 800 x 600 VGA video display (1024 x 768 recommended). CD-ROM drive (for initial installation). Available Serial or USB port for use by Microsoft ActiveSync application if installing to a field device.

Field Data Collector Requirements A field collector running Windows CE or Pocket PC operating systems. Minimum of 6 -14 MB of free storage space. Required storage space is dependent on the features chosen during the installation (i.e., a single Geoid file is 4 MB). Ability to be connected to the PC by ActiveSync. Note: an alternate "card installer" is available for large organizations that do not allow ActiveSync to be installed on their users computers. A VGA display (mono or color). Recommended Data Collectors: Allegro CX by Juniper Systems, Inc. and JETT by Two Technologies, Inc. Other Supported Data Collectors: IPAQ Pocket PC, Allegro CE by Juniper Systems, Inc., and the DAP 5320 (Titan) by DAP Technologies.

! SMI runs on numerous other Pocket PC and Windows CE devices. However, issues other than those of the operation of the SMI software are not supported.

54

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Authorizing SMI
If you purchased the field computer from Eagle Point it was most likely shipped with the SMI software preinstalled and preauthorized. Installing or updating SMI from files on your PC requires you to get an authorization number. This number is needed for both the 30-day demo and permanent authorizations. This authorization number is generated using the serial number of the device. You must call Eagle Point at (800) 678-6565 to get an authorization number (have the device ID available when you call). Other ways to contact SMI/Eagle Point: Main Office: (563) 556-8392 Main Office Toll-Free: (800) 678-6565 Fax Number: (563) 556-5321 Email: authcodes@eaglepoint.com Normal business hours are from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM CST., Monday through Friday

Before You Install SMI

Migrating to SMI Version 8
By installing SMI Version 8 on the same device or storage card as V7, your license is automatically migrated from the old version to the newer version. However, the contents of your job list along with any Custom Favorites and Custom Keys menu files are NOT transferred to the new installation. Newer Command Favorites and Command Keys menus are installed with the new installation. If you want to re-use your menu files, you may manually copy these files from their original location to the new location. # Be sure to install the same version of the program that was installed before. For example, if SMI Construction with Robotics/GPS support was installed for SMI V7 be sure to install SMI Construction with Robotics/GPS support for SMI V8 otherwise you will need to re-authorize your SMI product. You will then need to reinstall the correct program and re-enter your original authorization code.

Backing Up the Entire Job Listing

SMI stores all of your current job listings and all accompanying job data (coordinates, raw data, note table, cut sheets, chains, etc.) in one (1) storage file: Port2.bin. If you dont want to use SMI Transfer to export every job and chain file, you can take this single file (similar to the contents of the RAM card that 55

was used in the HP 48) and back the whole file up to your PC desktop. Once SMI Version 8 is installed to your device or storage card, you can copy the Port2.bin file from the old installation location (/Emu48CE or /SMI Allegro, etc.) or the backed up location on your PC desktop and paste it into the new install location (/SMI). Be sure SMI isnt running while performing this exercise.

Un-Installing SMI V7.#x

This is not a required step, as SMI Version 8 installs to a separate folder on the device or storage card. However, if you attempt to install SMI Version 8 but it reports to you that there is not enough free space in the location that you wish to install it, you will need to increase available space on your device or storage card. One option is to uninstall Classic SMI V7 from your data collector. To do so, proceed through the following steps: # Uninstalling SMI V7 before completely installing SMI Version 8 may require you to re-authorize your product. The authorization code that was generated for you in the past should still work on this device for the licensed product.

CE Platform: 1. From the device itself, tap on the Start button: 2. Tap Settings > Control Panel.

3. Double tap on the Remove Programs icon: Pocket PC: 1. From the device itself, tap on the windows logo (name will change based on active application): 2. Tap Settings then tap the System tab at the bottom.

3. Tap on the Remove Programs icon: All Platforms: 4. Select the SMI program from the list of installed applications and tap the Remove button. This should remove the application and create more free space on the device or storage card.

56

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Installing SMI Using ActiveSync

When your data collector is shipped from Eagle Point, it should already be preinstalled and preauthorized. Installing or updating SMI from files on your PC requires Microsoft's ActiveSync program to be installed and operating on the PC with access to the files. You may install ActiveSync from your SMI Installation CD, or download it for free at http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/downloads/default.mspx (look for a hyperlink that says "Active Sync x.y.z" where x, y and z represent the current release of ActiveSync). Once you have ActiveSync installed, you may begin the update/installation process using the installation files found on the SMI Installation CD. ! If you do not first install and run ActiveSync you will have problems getting your data collector to be recognized by your PC). 1. If you have an Allegro and a Power Dock, connect the Power Dock to the PC using a USB port on your PC. Attach the power supply to the Power Dock and insert the Allegro into the dock. If you have a Pocket PC, JETT, Titan, or other device, connect the device to the PC using either a serial or USB cable. 2. If you are using a JETT, Titan or other data collector without a USB connection, you must doubletap on the PC Link icon to activate the connection from the device. ActiveSync should automatically detect the unit and issue a query prompt to create a partnership. For the purpose of installing or updating the device, you do not need to form a partnership with the device. Therefore, you may either select NO or press CANCEL and the device is connected as a GUEST. As a guest, ActiveSync does not prompt you to synchronize your documents (import / export files), calendar, contacts, etc.

57

Figure 2-1 New Partnership Wizard

3. If you plan on using any of the following features of a device partnership, follow the ActiveSync steps to create a partnership between the data collector and the PC. Otherwise, select No. Automatically synchronize (transfer) files (documents, jobs, ASCII files, etc.) from your device your computer when connected. Send and receive email from your device. Browse cached internet pages while in the field. Manage Tasks Calendar appointments and Notes between your PC's Outlook and your field device.

! If you select No for setting up a partnership you are prompted every time you dock the device. This might be reason enough to say Yes to the set up a partnership wizard. ! If this does not result in automatic connection, the Microsoft ActiveSync Connection Troubleshooter website http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=/support/pocketpc/tshoot/activesync/default.as p is a good resource for resolving connection issues.

58

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 2-2 Microsoft ActiveSync Dialog Box

4. Check the data collector's date and time to make sure it is correct. ! If you are updating your installation, it is necessary to exit the SMI applications properly prior to running the installation. 5. Insert the SMI Installation CD into the PC. The SMI Kiosk starts automatically. Select Install SMI Version 8 to Device. If your computer is configured to not automatically run files on a CD insertion, browse to the CD and launch the Setup.exe program. ! If you want to install the Windows Desktop Version of SMI select Install SMI Version 8 to PC. The Installation Wizard displays. This installs the SMI program on to your PC and/or any other device on which you need SMI installed. This installation also installs numerous other support files for the accurate operation of a GPS receiver, if needed. 6. Click on Next. The License Agreement screen for the HP Calculator Emulator displays. The Version 8 HP Calculator Emulator allows you to perform all the HP calculations you are used to directly on your data collection device; no need to carry a second device in the field! 7. Please read the agreement and when completed click on Yes to agree and continue. If you selected the Install SMI Version 8 to Device option from the SMI Kiosk the Device Selection screen displays next. Otherwise skip to step 9.

59

Figure 2-3 Device Selection

If your data collector/device was connected to the PC through ActiveSync, your device should be the default under the Select pull-down list. Your Device Name and Device Description should also be listed If you did not have your device connected through ActiveSync, connect it now and click on the Detect button. The pull-down menu should then display your device and device information. ! The Other Windows CE option should be used for Horizontal Screen layouts on CE devices, the Other Pocket PC option should be used on vertical screen layout Pocket PC devices (with or without a keyboard). 8. Click on Next once your device has been selected. The SMI License Agreement screen displays. 9. Read through the SMI License Agreement and click Yes to agree and continue. ! If you click No at this point, the Version 8 HP Calculator emulator will be installed to your device but there will be no SMI functionality. The next screen asks you to select which software products you wish to install.

60

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 2-4 Product Selection

10. Select the product(s) you wish to install and click Next. For example, if you purchased Construction with GPS/Robotics (CVR) you need to select Construction and toggle on the Robotics and GPS Support option. ! You should only select the product that has been licensed for use on the device. If an earlier version of SMI has been installed on the device, the installation wizard will automatically check the SMI version that has been installed. If you check the wrong product you will have to run the installation routine again and reenter your authorization code prior to being able to use the product. If you did not select the Robotic and GPS Support, skip to step 13. If you toggled on Robotic and GPS Support, the GPS Data screen displays.

61

Figure 2-5 GPS Data

The coordinate systems are listed to the left and the description of each are on the right. These systems are broken out to save room on your field device and to reduce the options that you must deal with in the coordinate system dialog boxes. 11. Select the coordinate system package that you will need when working in state plane jobs and click on Next. Selecting a particular option updates the text to the right that summarizes the available coordinate system groups you will install. The GEOID screen displays, prompting you to select which Geoid(s) you would like to install, if any.

62

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 2-6 GEOID Install Screen

12. First, select the year from which you would like to get the Geoid(s) (use the most recent publication year unless you have a really good reason not to), and then select which Geoid(s) you want from the given list. If you do not want to install a Geoid, just click next with no Geoids toggled on. ! Based on the latitude and longitude of your location, SMI automatically determines the correct geoid file from among any of the files inside the \SMI\GEOID folder. Therefore you can place any geoid file in the /GEIOD folder and SMI will automatically use the correct file. Be sure not to install geoid files from different subscription years unless they are geographically separated. For example: North America and Virgin Islands.

Figure 2-7 GEOID Help Dialog for 1999 and 2003

63

! Notice how each Geoid had a large overlap with the other. This may allow you to get away with installing only one Geoid. Be conservative on the number of Geoids that you install, each Geoid selected takes over 4 MB of storage space on your device or PC. ! The 1996 geoids are only included for reference or research work. You should always use the most recent Geoid, as these will contain the most accurate and up-to-date gravitational adjustments. 13. The Documentation screen displays next, prompting you to install any of the documentation on the data collector for reference in the field. Select the desired documentation options and click on Next.

Figure 2-8 Documentation Screen

The next two screens prompt you to select the installation path for all of the files that you have chosen to install. You should select an installation location that is either on a storage card or a non-volatile storage location on your device (i.e., C Drive, Storage Card, etc.). ! You may need to install Adobe Acrobat Reader on your field device or PC in order to view the electronic version of the documentation. The CD also contains a version of the electronic documentation in Microsoft Word format.

64

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 2-9 Documentation Install Screens

14. For each item, select the path and then click on Next on both screens. # It is not recommended to install files into devices Main Memory as they may be compromised if the device battery becomes fully discharged or the device is reset!

! You can choose the location for the program and other files (Main Memory, C_Drive, Storage Card, etc.), but you cannot change the actual path, as this is predetermined based on the location you choose to install the various components ! When installing to the PC, you can alter the paths by typing or pasting a path into the edit fields. ! You should select "Main Memory" for the Import / Export directory so that the files that you place in this directory can be automatically synchronized with those on the PC via ActiveSync. This is your "My Documents" directory on the field device. The Verification screen displays, allowing you to review the options you selected. 15. Click on Next to install SMI on your PC and/or your data collector. 16. When the Complete screen displays, click on Finish to close the Installation Wizard. You have successfully installed the SMI Field Survey software. # If you are updating from an older version, this is the point when old job data and menu changes can be brought over from the previous installation. Copy the Port2.bin file from your backup location into the location selected above in Step 14 for Program Files.

17. On the data collector, tap Start > Programs. 65

You should see the two new shortcuts (Classic SMI and Pocket SMI) displayed in the Start menu. You should also see the icon for Classic SMI on the desktop and in the system tray. 18. When you first run SMI after updating the software, the Try To Recover Memory prompt displays. Always tap <NO>.

Figure 2-10 Try To Recover Memory Prompt

! You need to re-establish your occupied point, backsight point, instrument driver, notes toggle, units (if in Metric mode) or similar settings after updating the software because these settings revert to the original defaults after installation. The Default.e48 file is deleted anytime you reinstall.

66

SMI Version 8 User Guide

WORKING WITH JOBS

In this chapter: Creating a New Job.............................................................68 Transferring a Job Using ActiveSync ..................................70 Transferring a Job Using SMI Transfer ...............................72 Using an Existing Job..........................................................74 Setting Up the Command Keys ...........................................75 Installing a Geoid File..........................................................78 Turning on the Geoid File Option ........................................78 Setting the Meters or Feet Option .......................................80

CHAPTER

67

This chapter explains how to get the data collector prepared to go into the field. It does not matter in which order the tasks in this chapter are performed, and some of them are optional. However, the first time you use the data collector, it is recommended that you work through all these tasks so you can become familiar with how to do them. The Allegro data collector is the most popular data collector used with SMI, so these instructions will show screen shots and key presses for the Allegro (however these key presses and screen shots are almost identical for the Titan and JETT ce devices). Users of other data collectors should be able to follow along by becoming familiar with the location of the referenced commands using this user guide and the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual. Use the following figure to become familiar with the Allegro screen and keyboard. ! The JETT screen is identical with the exception of the different arrangement of the Command Key Menu. ! The Titan screen is very similar. However, there are no F6 F10 keys in the command key menu.

Creating a New Job

Scenario: You do not have any points in the data collector or PC for the job you are starting. Perform the following steps to create a new job. 1. Press <JOB> (the A key on Allegro, the I key on Jett), then tap <NEW>.

68

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The Create New Job screen displays.

Figure 3-1 Create New Job Screen

2. Tap the <NEW> soft key on the screen. The New Job screen displays.

Figure 3-2 New Job Screen

3. Key in a job name (e.g., ECHLN2) and press !. The Setup screen displays, showing the current job name displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.

Figure 3-3 Setup Screen

69

Transferring a Job Using ActiveSync

When you first connect a device to a PC via ActiveSync, it prompts you to create a partnership with the device. One of the primary benefits to setting up a partnership with the device is to transfer files between the device and a PC without the use of SMI Transfer. You can also carry with you your contacts, email, and other documents. If this device is one that is shared among more than one individual, it is recommend not toggling on items such as Calendar or Contacts that may be specific to one individual. To use the Import and Export Jobs commands under the Transfer menu, you must perform the following steps: 1. Toggle Files ON. ! Always toggle Files on when creating or modifying a partnership with the device. This creates a folder on your desktop that you can put any job files or documents you want to synchronize with the device. If you have already created a partnership with the device but have not toggled this option ON, click on the Options button. This displays the Sync Options tab.

Figure 3-4 ActiveSync Options Dialog Box Sync Options Tab

2. Choose Main Memory for the Import/Export Directory when installing SMI.

70

SMI Version 8 User Guide

During the installation process, when you are prompted to choose the destination location for the Import Export Directory make sure you choose Main Memory for the location. This is so the job files you wish to exchange with the device are read from and written to a location that is synchronized with your PC.

Figure 3-5 SMI Install Wizard (Destination Page)

3. Create an SMI folder within the My Documents folder on the desktop. When you created the partnership with the device and you toggled the Files option ON, it created the folder on your desktop. SMIs data directory or folder is a folder called SMI and can be found in the My Documents folder. You can either manually create this folder, or if you export a job from the device, it creates the folder for you. Once this folder is created, copy files that you want to exchange with this device into and out of this folder. 4. Synchronize your device. If you device is connected via ActiveSync, press the Sync button to synchronize the files in this folder. In most cases, this happens automatically and doesnt require you to press the button.

Example
For example, you have a file with control points and two chain files to be used to stake a couple portions of road. The names of the files are Hwy181.asc, Hwy181a.ch, and Hwy181b.ch respectively. 1. Copy these three files to your My Documents folder them in a subfolder called SMI. on your Windows Desktop and place

2. If your device is already connected to your PC and ActiveSync is running, all you may need to do is click on the Sync button and the files are automatically transferred to your device. 3. From within SMI, tap Transfer > Import Jobs. 4. Highlight the job files that you want to import. 5. Tap on the Show drop list to display the types of files you want to import. In this case you are importing chain files and a coordinate file, so just choose the All Files option.

71

6. Highlight the job files you want to import.

Figure 3-6 Import Jobs Dialog Box

7. Tap the Import button. You can still transfer files the traditional way using SMI Transfer with a serial transfer cable (See Transferring a Job Using SMI Transfer on page 72).

Transferring a Job Using SMI Transfer

When using SMI on a data collector in conjunction with SMI Transfer on the PC, you are prompted to select files to transfer to the data collector. Complete the following steps to transfer data to the collector. 1. If you do not already have SMI Transfer installed on your PC, install it prior to proceeding. 2. Run SMI Transfer and click on the To DC menu option. 3. Click on the Transfer button. The Start Server Mode dialog box displays.

Figure 3-7 Start Server Mode Dialog Box

72 SMI Version 8 User Guide

4. Press <JOB> and tap <xfer> <pc>. Wait a few moments and the Select Files to Send to the Data Collector dialog box (Figure 3-8 on page 73) displays. The lists on this dialog box are multi-select, so you may choose several different files of each file type.

Figure 3-8 Select Files to Send to the Data Collector Dialog Box
5. Highlight a file within a column and press and hold down the Ctrl key on your PC keyboard to highlight and select multiple files per column. Highlight a file and press and hold down the Shift key to highlight and select a range of files. 6. Click on the Send button. The Transfer dialog box displays.

Figure 3-9 Transfer Dialog Box

73

Using an Existing Job

Scenario: You want to make a job that is already stored in the data collector the current job. Perform the following steps to open an existing job. 1. Press <JOB> , then tap <old>. The Resume Job screen displays.

Figure 3-10 Resume Job Screen

2. Use the Navigation buttons to highlight the desired job from the list and press ! on the keypad. The Setup screen displays, showing the current job name displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.

Figure 3-11 Setup Screen Current Job

74

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Setting Up the Command Keys

ICON: Scenario: You want to have quick access to the GPS functions. Perform the following steps to customize the command key settings. 1. Tap the Customize Command Keys icon located in the lower right portion of the screen (at the end of the Command Keys menu). The Select Command Keys Menu dialog box displays.

Figure 3-12 Select Command Keys Menu Dialog Box

2. Tap the Flex GPS menu entry on the screen. A list of the current commands associated with the GPS Collect menu displays.

Figure 3-13 Current Commands Dialog Box

75

3. Tap on OK to dismiss the Current Commands dialog box. The commands associated with the GPS Collect menu are assigned to the command keys.

Figure 3-14 Mapped Command Keys (Allegro Shown)

Adding a Command to the Command Keys Menu

To change the commands associated with a menu, perform the following steps. 1. Tap the Customize Command Keys icon located in the lower right portion of the screen (at the end of the Command Keys menu). The Select Command Keys Menu dialog box (Figure 3-12 on page 75) displays. 2. Tap on the Customize button. The Customize Command Keys dialog box displays.

Figure 3-15 Customize Command Keys Dialog Box

You may create a new menu, delete the current menu, add a command (provided you do not try to exceed the number of available function keys, see below), or remove a command. You may also change the order in which the commands are listed/assigned by highlighting the entry that

76

SMI Version 8 User Guide

you want to reorder and using the Up and Down arrow icons in the lower left corner of the dialog box. Platform Allegro CE Allegro CX JETT ce Titan Pocket PC Function Keys 10 (F6-10 Require the Blue Key) 10 (F6-10 Require the Blue Key) 10 (F9 & F10 Require the Blue Key) 5 4

3. Make sure that Flex GPS is the current menu. 4. Select the GPS Receiver Logging command. 5. Tap on the Remove button. 6. Tap on the Add button. The Add Command dialog box displays.

Figure 3-16 Add Command Dialog Box

7. Select GPS as the current command group. 8. Select Setup Multiple Rovers and tap on OK to add this command to the end of the GPS Collect menu. 9. Tap on OK to assign the GPS Collect menu to the command keys.

77

Figure 3-17 Command Keys Menu Command Added

Installing a Geoid File

To get accurate ground elevations with a GPS receiver on large jobs, it is necessary to install and use a Geoid file. Geoid files contain the differences between the ellipsoid heights coming from the receiver and mean sea level. The data collector does not come preinstalled with Geoid files because they are very large and may not be needed for the type of work you perform. Geoid files are available on the SMI Installation CD. See Geoid File Download in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for instructions on how to install the Geoid file for your region.

Turning on the Geoid File Option

Scenario: You want to have accurate elevations. ! After a Geoid file has been installed in the data collector, the Use Geoid option should be turned on. 1. Tap on the Geoid menu item in the Classic SMI interface.

Figure 3-18 Geoid Menu

2. If Use Geoid has a checkmark beside it, the option is already on. If it is not on, tap the Use Geoid option to turn it on. 78 SMI Version 8 User Guide

A message box confirms the status of the setting.

Figure 3-19 Using Geoid

Figure 3-20 Not Using Geoid

# If you turn off the Use Geoid option after having taken shots with it on, press <GPS> (the Z key), tap <opt>, type 0, and tap <geoid>. This sets the Geoid separation back to 0.

Accurate GPS Elevations

Because all GPS-derived elevations are less accurate than the horizontal position (note the horizontal position is usually only accurate to + or - 0.03), it is important that you know a couple of things: 1. Setting up over a point with a good known elevation is more accurate than shooting a benchmark. 2. Multiple reps are required to obtain moderately accurate elevations The basis for this argument is that GPS manufacturers "claim" around a +/- 15 mm + x ppm (1st Sigma or RMS both about 66%) for vertical accuracy (some systems like the SMI Flex are slightly better). This equates to any one shot being +/- .05. Its even possible (40% chance) that a larger error will occur. Because this error is possible when taking one shot (the benchmark shot) this error at one shot is used to calculate the new elevation at the base which is then used to determine the elevations of all the points shot from the base. In actuality, the maximum possible error in vertical is now double the 0.05 and is now 0.10 (44%) so there is a larger chance of a vertical error greater than 0.10. To eliminate this doubling of errors you can occupy a known point. Or, to reduce this error press <GPS> then tap <opt> <REPS> to average out the error. You will need to experiment with your GPS equipment to determine the required repetitions to obtain the accuracy that you need. Also, note the VDOP when doing your tests, because a high VDOP produces a greater range in your vertical measurements. Thanks to Marshal Rocks for his contribution to this topic.

79

SMI supports the following Geoids: Geoid03, Geoid99, Geoid96, and all other Ordinance Survey data files produced by the US NGS.

Setting the Meters or Feet Option

The SMI software can work in Meters or Feet mode. Coordinates and distances are assumed to be meters or US feet, depending on a setting in the Change menu. 1. Press <CHG> (the B key, the JETT W key) to display the Change menu. If there is an M to the left of SMI, then Meter mode is on.

Figure 3-21 Change Settings Screen

2. To change the current setting, press <NeXT> <MODE> and then the <FEET> / <METR> soft key toggle.

Figure 3-22 Feet Mode / Meter Mode

80

SMI Version 8 User Guide

DATA COLLECTION
In this chapter: Instrument Support ..............................................................82 Create a New Job ................................................................83 Notes, Elevations, and Raw Data........................................85 Basic Surveying ...................................................................90 Electronic Data Entry .........................................................110 Transformation...................................................................111 Staking Points....................................................................114 Working with Elevations ....................................................118 Predetermined Area...........................................................122 Sunshots............................................................................125 Stake to a Point .................................................................134 Stake to a Line...................................................................138 Stake to a Curve Using the Stake Command....................138 Stake to a Curve Using the Stake to a Curve Command ..139 Stake to Points in the Random Points File ........................140 Staking by Station (STA) and Offsets................................142 Multiple Sets of Angles to Multiple Points..........................144 Shots Routine Using an Instrument...................................146 Storing Elevations at Known North and East Points .........149 Separate Distance and Angle............................................184 Azimuth Surveying.............................................................189

CHAPTER

81

SMIs Data Collection allows you the option of working manually or electronically with all current and most older electronic total stations. It includes a full-featured coordinate geometry program which allows for such things as a true free station capability from only two control points, industry leading routines for offsetting points, remote points, triangle solutions, radial staking, separate distance, and angle shots. Data Collection also give you the power to enter deeds, field note data, or coordinates. You can even key in the data manually from the instrument and instantly have the coordinates stored by point number to use in SMIs coordinate geometry functions. This chapter outlines the steps to assist you to be on your way to performing side shots, traversing, staking, and computing curves, intersections, areas, perimeters, and closures. Work in feet or meters and north or south azimuth. Input can be in bearings, angles right, azimuths, or deflection angles. You can convert feet, inches, and fractions of an inch into decimal feet, or convert grads to degrees, minutes, and seconds, and vice versa. Rotate, translate, and scale any set of points on a job. While in the program, you can add, subtract, multiply, or divide numbers. Convert degrees, minutes, and seconds to decimal degrees, and vice versa. Use two points to determine direction while traversing, taking side shots, or computing intersections. Stake a curve from a PC and increment the stations along the centerline or along a specified offset from the centerline. Settings for Earth curvature and refraction, elevations, and an industrial strength Sunshot program with its own ephemeris and ability to compute astronomic or grid north are available. Trig-leveling functions let you pull in an elevation from a benchmark and use it to stake and get cuts and fills or use side shot to collect north, east, and elevation points. Predetermined areas can be computed using either the Hinge method or Slide method. Data Collection also offers staking, which gives angles to turn and distance to go, as well as go/come and left/right values.

Instrument Support
Electronic Total Stations
SMI works with nearly all current electronic total station instruments and almost all discontinued models. SMI does not work with two older Nikon instruments: DTM1 and DTM5, since these were not equipped with standard serial ports. SMI also does not work with some Topcon ET1 models. SMI requires a special old style cable to work with Topcons GTS3, which has no serial port. This special cable works with the battery port. See the Instrument section of the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information on the supported models. 82

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Various electronic total stations can be selected in the SMI software. Press <SETUP> (Allegro F key, Titan G key, JETT J key) <NeXT> <NeXT> <INST>. Most instruments allow you to choose between Fine and CRS modes. When you enter this menu, the instruments are listed under the manufacturers name. To find your specific model, press <NeXT> until your make appears on one of the soft keys.

GPS Receivers
Numerous GPS receivers are supported, including NavCom (SMI Flex GPS both RT and SF models pole mount and backpack configurations); Allen Osborne; Leica 500 series; all Ashtech Z's; all Topcon; and Javad Legacy and Hipers, and many others by use of the NMEA LLG, PKG, and GGA drivers. Our goal is to support all current GPS receivers with native drivers.

Create a New Job

1. Press <JOB> (the A key, JETT I key). The Jobs screen displays.

Figure 4-1 Jobs Screen

2. From the soft key menu, tap <NEW>.

Figure 4-2 Create New Job Screen

You now have the option of changing the beginning point number or coordinates of point 1 in the new job. Elevations are on, so you could change the elevation of point one. Whether notes are on or not, you can give a note for point one. Some surveyors like to give the job name for the note

83

for point one so that whenever the ASCII point list is printed, you know the job name from the first point description.

Example
For this example, you will change the east coordinate to 10000 and enter the note YOUNG for point 1. 1. Key in 10000 and tap <E>. 2. Tap <NOTE>, key in YOUNG, and press !. The screen should resemble the figure below.

Figure 4-3 Point 1 Note

! By tapping <NOTE>, alpha was automatically turned on. ! If you are willing to accept the default coordinates and no note entry for point 1, you simply press <JOB> <NEW> <NEW>. 3. Tap <NEW>. The display shows NEW JOB? and the cursor flashes at the bottom left of the display. ! The alpha symbol appears at the top of the display. This indicates that pressing a letter key will type the actual alpha character, instead of the function assigned to that particular key. 4. For your sample job, type YOUNG and press !.

84

SMI Version 8 User Guide

You should see the following:

Figure 4-4 Setup Screen

! YOUNG:CRD indicates the YOUNG is the job name, and CRD indicates that the YOUNG job is being stored on the devices card memory. ! The Setup screen also includes the display: 0 0000"-1-1 NN 2. ! The first number, 0 0000 is the back azimuth, or back point. Normally, it is the backsight point number. The second number, 1, is the occupied point number. The third number, 1, is the last point stored or staked. ! At this stage, you have no backsight or foresight point stored. Thus, your backsight is set to 0 degrees, and your foresight is the same number as your occupied point. ! NN 2 means next number 2, indicating that the next point number to be stored is point 2.

Notes, Elevations, and Raw Data

When you installed your SMI surveying program, the notes and prompts were not activated. This means that your data collector will not prompt you for a reference note for each point stored. To turn this function on, press <CHG> (the B key, JETT W key). This first Change menu is where you can toggle off and on the flags at the top of the display screen. Or you can press a (Shift Left) for the shortcuts. At the Change/Default menu, you will see raw, elevation, and notes shown as soft keys.

Figure 4-5 Change Settings Screen

85

These are toggle keys. To turn on an option, tap the appropriate soft key. A box appears in the soft key to indicate that the function has been selected, or turned on. To toggle the function off, tap the soft key again. <OVRW> / <RAW> and <ELEV> are two-way toggles, but <NOTE> is a four-way toggle. Each time you tap this soft key, you get a different soft key. It toggles as follows: <NOTE> / <AUTO> / <LNTE> / <NTBL>. For example, tap <NOTE>. The soft key changes to <AUTO> and the display reads:

PROMPTING OFF, WILL STORE LAST NOTE.

Tap <AUTO> and you get <LNTE>. The display reads:

PROMPTING WITH LAST NOTE.

! See below for more information on the Prompting with last note option and Note Sequencing Tap <LNTE> and you get <NTBL>. The display reads:

PROMPTING WITH NOTE TABLE

Tap <NTBL> and you get <NOTE>. The display reads:

PROMPTING OFF, WONT STORE LAST NOTE

Shortcuts to the Above Functions: Use a <2> to toggle raw data on or off. Use a <3> to toggle Elevations on or off. Use a <4> to toggle note options.

For this example, leave on PROMPTING WITH LAST NOTE.

86

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The display includes flags (next to USER / SMI) to indicate which of the following data collection features are selected and currently active: Flag Indicates Does not warn before overwriting a point. Raw data is on. Elevations are on. Note prompting is on. Instrument driver is active (electronic data collection selected).

O R Z N I

! If the above flags (letters) are not displayed next to SMI, this means the feature is not activated.

Note Sequencing
Note sequencing uses a single list of notes (no duplicates) and cycles to the next note in the sequence until the sequence is done. For example, if your sequence was: ES1, EP1, CL, EP2, ES2. If you enter ES1 when prompted for a note, the next default note will not be ES1 but will be the next note in the sequence of EP1. If you would have entered CL, the next default will be EP2, etc. This allows you to start a sequence at any point you want (for example a large highway cross section where the surveyor may need to collect a number of unrelated topo points before resuming his 10 point cross section sequence).

Requirements for Note Sequencing to work:

1. Create a "Note Table" with only the entries in it that you want transferred to the SEQuence list. Order is very important. See the SMI Reference Manual for more information on creating a Note Table. 2. Run the T>SE command (JOB > NeXT Menu) and tap <YES> to transfer the current "Note Table" to the SEQ list. 3. Must have <SEQ> enabled (JOB > NeXT Menu) 4. Must have PROMPTING WITH LAST NOTE enabled. ! To turn this feature off simply toggle the note prompting to something other than PROMPTING WITH LAST NOTE.

87

! You can place multiple sequences in a single sequence file (ES1, EP1, CL, EP2, ES2, SW1, SW2, etc.) Remember the user can enter the sequence anywhere they want so entering SW1 for shot A, would cause the next default to be SW2 (SW = Sidewalk). ! When the program reaches the end of the sequence it will display a blank default, if you want the program to start over again type the starting note of the sequence (i.e., ES1 or SW1) ! Build the Note Table in reverse order (SMI always puts the most recently used note at the top of the list). ! You can transfer note tables automatically using SMI Transfer. If you use a field code library that doesnt represent a sequence list: You could build a Sequence table > transfer it as the note table to the collector > run the <T>SE> command, then delete the Note Table with the <DELN> (Job > NeXT Menu) command, then lastly transfer your standard field code library to the device. ! Once you've built your sequence list, the note table is not required, but is still useful for the PROMPTING WITH NOTE TABLE option.

Selecting Your Instrument

1. Press <SETUP> (Allegro F key, Titan G key, JETT J key) <NeXT> <NeXT> <INST>.

Figure 4-6 Instruments Screen

At the Instruments screen, the soft keys allow you to choose manual data entry (<MAN1> or <MAN2>), or the specific instrument you are using. 2. You can press <NeXT> to scroll through the soft key menu for additional instrument choices.

Figure 4-7 Instrument Screens with Additional Soft Keys

88 SMI Version 8 User Guide

3. Choose the brand name. This takes you to a submenu of the types of instruments. 4. Find your instrument. If one choice does not work for your instrument, try another. In some cases, you may need to change the baud rate or parity in your instrument. See the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information. For example, to select Topcon 803, tap <TOPCO> then press <NeXT> , then tap <800>. To select Nikon, tap <NIKN>. If you see a delay time, press !. ! If a delay time prompt appears, the number that appears is the default and it is always best to press ! to accept the default. When the instrument is selected and SMI returns to the Setup screen, you will notice that I appears at the top of the display. This indicates that an instrument has been selected for electronic data entry. SMI Version 8 supports almost all of the electronic instruments on the market today. See Instrument Support on page 82.

Connect the Data Collector to Your Instrument

Connect the instrument cable to the COM 1 on the data collector and you are ready to begin collecting data. This is how job data is transferred between your electronic instrument and your data collector. If you need to connect your instrument to something other than COM 1, set the appropriate COM port using File > Settings.

Figure 4-8 Settings Dialog Box

89

Basic Surveying
Now that you know a little about what you can do with the SMI Data Collection program, work through the following examples using some of these basic surveying functions. This chapter assumes you have already installed your SMI software and overlay. (If not, refer to Installation, which begins on page 53.) You can use the job that was automatically created when you installed the software, or create your own following the instructions in Working with Jobs, which begins on page 67 and Creating a New Job on page 68. The following examples show JOB1 as the job name.

Inputting Points Manually

There are three common ways to input points or store coordinates in SMI: <SIDS> (Allegro J key, Titan K key, JETT M key) for side shot, <TRAV> (Allegro K key, Titan L key, JETT P key) for traverse, and <STO PT> (Allegro P key, Titan Q key, JETT K key) for store coordinate. ! There are actually five if you have the GPS / Robotics version. The <BASE> command creates a point if you use the Get Position Here option for State Plane GPS Base Point. Also, using the <2PFS> (two-point free station) command gives you the option to save the occupied point. Key <SIDS> Function The Side Shot key is a function and menu key. It allows you to electronically or manually take a single horizontal angle, zenith angle, and slope distance to a point; convert to coordinates; and store by point number without changing the occupied point and backsight point. The Traverse key is a function and menu key as well. It works exactly as the side shot function, with one exception: after the point has been stored, the new point is occupied and the backsight point becomes the point that was previously occupied. Think of it as the instrument following the rod around your job with every new point that is stored, whereas in side shot, the rod is the only thing moving around and the instrument is staying put. The Store Coordinate function lets you enter points using coordinates and data for existing point coordinates.

<TRAV>

<STO PT>

Inputting Points Using Side Shot

This example shows you how to input points manually into the SMI program.

90

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The word SETUP should be on the screen; if it is not, press <SETUP> on the keyboard. You should see these numbers 000'00"-1-1 NN 2 below the word SETUP.

SMI Program Setup Screen Definitions

Value 000'00" The middle 1 The next 1 Definition This value is your backsight (there is no backsight point, so the backsight angle displays). This value is the occupied point, or where the instrument is setup. This value is the last number that was stored in the program. (In this example, the only number in the program is the default point 5000 Northing 5000 Easting, so point number 1 is shown in both locations.) These letters stand for Next Number to be stored. As you can see, the next number to be stored is 2. This value represents the height of the instrument and is used for elevations. This value represents the height of the rod and is used for elevations.

NN2 HI ROD

1. Start a new job (see Creating a New Job on page 68). 2. Press <SIDS> .

Figure 4-9 Side Shot Screen Menu 1

The Side Shot screen displays. This is the first side shot soft key menu for a manual entry. See Side Shots in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for an explanation of the Side Shot Menu soft keys. When you press <NeXT> , the second Side Shot menu displays.

91

Figure 4-10 Side Shot Screen Menu 2

You can use the Side Shot menus to key in the angle right, distance, or horizontal angle in any order. 3. Key in the number 0 and tap <~RT>. This is the backsight for this example. Notice the <~RT> soft key is no longer visible and 0 is given for the angle right, azimuth, and bearing. The DF angle is the deflection angle. 4. Key in 96.22 and tap <SDIST> for slope distance. Because slope distance is being used, you are now prompted for the zenith angle, or vertical angle. 5. Key in 93.2535 and tap <Z~>. You will hear a beep, indicating that the point has been stored.

Figure 4-11 Point 2 Stored

This screen shows that 94.2495 is the elevation for the last point stored, and angle 0.00'00" is the backsight. (This could be a point number, but for this example, an angle is being shown.) Point 1 is being occupied, 2 is the last number stored, NN 3 is the next number to be used, BRG: is the last bearing stored, and DIS: is the last distance stored. Notice that the menu 1 soft keys display. For the next point, perform the following steps.

92

SMI Version 8 User Guide

6. Key in 110.4355 and tap <~RT>. 7. Key in 38.82 and tap <SDIST>. 8. Key in 86.0755 and tap <Z~>.

Figure 4-12 Point 3 Stored

Point number 3 has been stored. 9. You will enter one more point for this example. Use the following information: Right Angle = 225.2305 Slope Distance = 57.69 Zenith Angle = 85.4510

After you key in this information and hear the beep, the screen should resemble the figure below.

Figure 4-13 Point 4 Stored

To double check, do a screen plot to see the points stored. 10. Press <RPTS> (Allegro S key, Titan T key, JETT N key). 11. Key in 1.4 and press !. 12. Tap <SPLOT>, then tap <SPLOT> again. The points and line should resemble the figure below:

93

Figure 4-14 Side Shots Example

Point 1 is where the instrument is located. Points 2, 3, and 4 are where the rodman has taken the prism. The instrument was turned to the different points to take the distances and angles.

Example 2 Inputting Points While Traversing

In this example, you will learn how to use SMI to traverse, inverse, compute area, check closure, traverse from an existing point, find a missing line, and compute curve data. See Traverse in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information on this command.

Figure 4-15 Traversing the Boundary

1. Start a new job (see Creating a New Job on page 68). 2. Press <TRAV> . (Allegro K key, Titan L key, JETT P key)

Figure 4-16 Traverse Menu Menu 1

Notice that the numbers have not changed. The EL for elevation has been added with an elevation of 0.0000 if you started with the default job of JOB:1. If you started a new job, the

94

SMI Version 8 User Guide

standard default elevation of 100.0000 displays above the backsight. The BRG (bearing) appears, showing the last backsight angle taken. Below that is the last DIS (distance) taken. When you press <NeXT> , the second Traverse menu displays.

Figure 4-17 Traverse Menu Menu 2

3. Press <NeXT> , to return to first traverse menu. Key in 15 for the bearing and tap <BRG>. You are prompted: QUADRANT? 4. Key in 1 for the North East quadrant and press !.

Figure 4-18 Quadrants

The following screen displays.

Figure 4-19 Entering the Bearing for Point 2

5. Key in 200 for the distance and tap <HDIST>. You are prompted: CHANGE IN EL? The number 0 will be blinking. 6. Press ! to accept 0 for this example. ! If you have Elevations turned off, this prompt does not occur.

95

Figure 4-20 Entering the Horizontal Distance for Point 2

Point 2 is stored. Note the changes in the screen. The backsight has changed to 1 instead of the angle 000'00". Because you are traversing, the occupied point has changed to 2, and the last number stored is 2 as well. The next number is 3. The BRG: is 1500'00" and the DIS: is 200, the last numbers you manually entered. At a glance, the SMI screen shows that the backsight is 1, you are sitting at 2, and waiting to shoot 3 with an Elevation of 100.0000. You will now turn off Elevations before you enter any more points because you will not be using them for this example. 7. Press a <EL> (On the JETT it is the 3 key labeled ELEV) The Z flag at the top of the screen disappears, and the message WON'T STORE ELEVATIONS confirms that the flag is off. 8. Press <TRAV> . Note that the elevation information (EL, H I, and ROD) have been removed from the screen. 9. Key in 87.5030 and tap <BRG>. 10. Key in 1 for North East quadrant and press !.

Figure 4-21 Entering the Bearing for Point 3

11. Key in 540 and tap <HDIST>. 96 SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-22 Entering the Horizontal Distance for Point 3

Point 3 is stored. 12. Key in 218.20 and tap <BRG>. This is not a mistake. This is a shortcut for entering the quadrant number. The 2 in front of the 18.20 is for quadrant 2. Note that you were not prompted for the quadrant.

Figure 4-23 Entering the Bearing for Point 4

13. Key in 200 and tap <HDIST>.

Figure 4-24 Entering the Horizontal Distance for Point 4

Point 4 is stored. The azimuth and bearing between points 4 and 1 are unknown. If you inverse between the two points, the azimuth and bearing will be provided.

97

Figure 4-25 Inverse Example

You will now inverse between points 4 and 1. 14. Key in 4 <SPACE> 1 and press <PT-PT> (Allegro U, Jett X, Titan V).

Figure 4-26 Inversing from Point 4 to Point 1

You will now traverse from point 4 to point 5 15. Press <TRAV> . 16. Key in 87.5540 and tap <BRG>. You are prompted to key in a quadrant number. 17. Key in 3 (quadrant 3) and press !. You could have also keyed in 387.5540, skipping the screen asking for the quadrant number and saving a keystroke.

Figure 4-27 Entering the Bearing for Point 5

98 SMI Version 8 User Guide

18. Key in 654.72 and tap <HDIST>.

Figure 4-28 Entering the Horizontal Distance for Point 5

SMI can compare the beginning points and ending points of your traverse to see if the traverse closes. 19. To check the error from 5 to 1, key in 5 <SPACE> 1 and press <PT-PT> . In this example, the distance between the two points is the difference of 0.0022.

Figure 4-29 Checking the Error from Point 5 to Point 1

You will now check acreage, square feet, perimeter, and precision. 20. Press <RPTS> (Allegro S, Jett N, Titan T). The soft keys that now appear move the cursor around. Experiment with them after entering some numbers to see what happens. 21. Key in 1.5 <SPACE> 1 and press !. The period in 1.5 means through. Points 1 through 5 will be calculated. The second 1 after the space closes the loop back to the point of beginning. 22. Tap <PREC>. This displays the acres, square feet, perimeter (PER), and precision.

99

Figure 4-30 Checking the Acreage, Square Feet, Perimeter, and Precision
Whatever the distance error is, the traverse will be evenly dispersed through the legs or points of the traverse, making the precision perfect. It is very important that the last point in the random points file should be the accepted point. The second-to-last traverse point in the file should be the point shot to the accepted point at the end of the traverse.

Figure 4-31 Performing a Compass Rule Adjustment

You will now perform a compass rule adjustment. 23. Press <NeXT> and tap <CR>. The display shows Done. 24. Press <Esc> to clear the message. Notice that the precision is now perfect.

100

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-32 Compass Rule Adjustment

You will now make a change in the boundary. A new corner has been agreed upon as S 71 40 W 220 feet from point 4, as shown in Figure 4-31 on page 100. To eliminate the old point 5, which is near 1, and store the new point 5, reoccupy point 4 and traverse the new line to point 5: 25. Press <SETUP> , key in 5, and press c ! for Next Number (NN). This sets the next number (NN) to 5 so that whenever the next point is stored, it is stored at point 5. 26. Press 4 then tap <OCPY> to occupy point 4. The display now reads 5-4-1 NN 5. (Remember that the middle number is the occupied point, or where the instrument is setup.) 27. Press 3, then tap <BKPT> to make 3 your backsight. The display now reads 3-4-1 NN 5. 28. Press <TRAV> . 29. Key in 71.4 and tap <BRG>. Key in 3 (quadrant number) and press !. You can use the shortcut by keying in 371.4 and skipping the screen asking for the quadrant number, saving you a keystroke. 30. Key in 220 and tap <HDIST>. Since point 5 was already stored, the data collector beeps and prompts:

POINT 5 USED OVERWRITE POINT?

31. Press ! to overwrite point 5.

101

Figure 4-33 Traversing to Point 5

! If you get a prompt that says POINT # USED OVERWRITE POINT? and you wish to store at another point number, key in the new point number and press !. If you do not wish to overwrite the point, press <Esc> and !. You will now find the bearing and distance from point 5 to point 1 and store it at point 6. 32. Key in 5 <SPACE> 1 and press <PT-PT> .

Figure 4-34 Finding the Bearing and Distance for Point 6

33. Press <SETUP> , key in 5, and tap <OCPY> (if you are not occupying that point already). 34. Press <TRAV> , key in 484.0952, and tap <BRG>. Or, you can go the long way and key in 84.0952 on this screen, then 4 for the quadrant number on the next screen. 35. Key in 447.78 and tap <HDIST>. Point 6 is stored. You will now find the error from 6 to 1. 36. Key in 6 <SPACE> 1 and press <PT-PT> .

102

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-35 Finding the Error from Point 6 to Point 1

You will now find the new acreage by using the random points file. This file will list the point numbers of the boundary, where the closing point and the first point with the perfect coordinates will be listed last. 37. Press <RPTS> . The data last entered displays. 38. Press <Esc> to clear the old data. 39. Key in 1.6 <SPACE> 1 and press !. All points from 1 through 6 are defined by 1.6. 40. Tap <PREC>.

Figure 4-36 Displaying the Acres, Square Feet, and Precision

You will now insert a curve at point 5 as the PI (point of intersection) with a tangent distance of 110 feet. First, you will find the delta at the PI at point 5 and use <CAR> (Compute Angle Right) to find the deflection angle: 41. Press <MORE> (Allegro T key, Titan U key, JETT O key), <CAR>, key in 4 <SPACE> 5, and tap <BKAZ>. This gives you the back azimuth when occupying 5 and looking back to point 4. 42. Key in 5 <SPACE> 1 and tap <FSAZ>.

103

This gives you the forward azimuth when occupying 5 and looking at point 1. The delta angle is 24 10 07.

Figure 4-37 Finding the Delta Angle at the PI at Point 5

Figure 4-38 Delta Angle

43. To occupy 4 and traverse from 4 toward 5 for 110 feet to the PC, press <SETUP> . Key in 4, tap <OCPY>, key in 3, tap <BKPT>, and then press <TRAV> . 44. Key in 4 <SPACE> 5 and tap <AZ>.

Figure 4-39 Entering the Azimuth Between Points 4 and 5

45. Key in 110 and tap <HDIST>.

104

SMI Version 8 User Guide

This stores point 7. It is the PC, or Point of Curvature.

Figure 4-40 Entering the Horizontal Distance Between Points 4 and 5

You will now compute the radius point and PT point. 46. Press <CURVE> (Allegro Q key, Titan R key, JETT a U). This displays the Curve soft key menu. 47. Key in 110 and tap <t> (for tangent). 48. Key in 24.1008 and tap <> (for delta).

Figure 4-41 Entering the Tangent

49. Tap <RIGHT>. The angles shown after RAD (Radius), TAN, and CRD (Chord) are the azimuths from the radius point to the PC (point of curvature), the azimuth along the tangent from the PC to the PI, and the azimuth along the chord from the PC to the PT.

Figure 4-42 Entering the Delta

50. Tap <STORE>. 105

Figure 4-43 Horizontal Curves

You will now check to see if point 9 is correct. 51. Key in 5 <SPACE> 9 and press <PT-PT> .

Figure 4-44 Checking Point 9

You will now find the new acreage. 52. Press <RPTS> . 53. Press <Esc> to remove old information in the Random Points list. 54. Key in 1.4 <SPACE> "7 <SPACE> 8 <SPACE> 9" <SPACE> 6 <SPACE> 1. The display should look like this: 1.4 7 8 9 6 1. 55. Press !. 56. Tap <prec>.

Figure 4-45 Finding the New Acreage

106

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-46 Northern Point Computation

You will now cut a lot off the west side of this parcel. First, you will compute a point on the north side parallel to the west side using point 9 on the south side. 57. Press <> for Intersections (Allegro R key, Titan S key, JETT U key). The Intersect menu displays. 58. To define the first line, key in 9 and tap <PT 1> (for point #1).

Figure 4-47 Defining the First Point on the First Line

59. Key in 1 <SPACE> 2 and tap <AZ1> (for azimuth #1). 60. Define the second line by keying in 2 and tapping <PT 2>. 61. Key in 3 and tap <Pol2> (point on line).

107

Figure 4-48 Defining the Second Point on the Second Line

62. Tap <store> to store a new point at the intersection.

Copy JOB1
To copy JOB1 to a job named EXAMPLE, complete the following steps. 1. Press <JOB> .

Figure 4-49 Jobs Screen

2. Tap <COPY>. 3. Highlight the job you want to copy and Press !. If this is the only job you have in the data collector, it will already be highlighted. 4. Type the new job name: EXAMPLE and press !. You are now working with the job you copied. Any changes you make are made to EXAMPLE, not JOB1.

View Coordinates
To view the coordinates, follow the steps below.

108

SMI Version 8 User Guide

1. Press <VIEW> (Allegro C key, JETT V key). 2. Tap <PNTS>. Point 1 is displayed. 3. Tap <NEXT> for point two. Tap <NEXT> for point three, etc.

Figure 4-50 Point 1-3 Coordinates

To view the lowest point number stored, tap <BEGP> To view the highest point number stored, tap <ENDP> As you can see, viewing coordinates is very simple.

Inverse by Coordinates
SMI allows you to inverse using coordinates. This will be illustrated by inversing from point 2 to 3 using the coordinates of these points as shown in View Coordinates on page 108. This operation will inverse between two coordinate pairs without storing them. 1. Key in 5193.1852 and press !. 2. Key in 5051.7638 and press !. 3. Key in 5213.5222 and press !. 4. Key in 5591.3807 and press !. 5. Press a <PT-PT> . 109

Figure 4-51 Inversing by Coordinates

! The soft keys at the bottom do not change when this command is used. The soft keys are the same as the last soft keys displayed. In this case, you happened to be in the <VIEW> menu, so those soft keys display. If you do have the points stored, as you do here, it is much easier to inverse by point number. Simply key in 2 <SPACE> 3 and press <PT-PT> . The same information as displayed in Figure 4-51 on page 110 is shown, except at the top, where the display shows the points used in the inverse. ! Inversing by point number is much easier and faster, and you are much less likely to make an error. ! The only time to inverse by coordinates is when the coordinates are not stored by point number, and when you do not wish to store them.

Electronic Data Entry

In Inputting Points Manually on page 90, you were given examples where <SIDS> <TRAV> , and <SHOT> were pressed and you were prompted for slope distance, zenith angle, and angle right. For electronic data entry, select your instrument by pressing <SETUP> <NeXT> <NeXT> <INST>. Then choose the manufacturer and model. You may need to press <NeXT> to see the manufacturer and/or model of your instrument. Flag I displays to the left of SMI when you have chosen an instrument. If you have chosen your instrument and wish to enter data manually, it is not necessary to switch to <MAN1>. You can press a <5> on the Allegro, JETT or Titan. This toggles to <MAN1> mode. When you do this, the I flag disappears.

110

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-52 Instrument Mode Off / Instrument Mode On

Transformation
Under <RPTS> (Allegro S key, Titan T key, JETT N key) is the Transformation (<CX>) function. This function use can be used to rotate, translate, and scale coordinates. You can rotate, translate, or scale or use any combination of these operations at the same time.

Rotate to the State Plane Direction, Translate to the State Plane Coordinates, and Scale from Feet to Meters
This example will show you how to rotate, translate, and scale at the same time. ! You are now in the copied job that was called EXAMPLE. This rotation, translation, and scaling leaves JOB 1 intact. At the end of this example, we will show: The State Plane Coordinates in meters for point 3 will be: North: 12,573,465.122 East: 7,442,381.498 The State Plane direction from point 3 to point 4 will report S 192330 E. The EXAMPLE job is in feet. You will convert it to meters. The scale factor for converting from feet to meters is 0.3048006096 (U.S. foot) or 0.3048 (International foot).

You will first determine all of the points that need to be transformed. 1. Press <SETUP> . Then, key in 500 and press a <FAP> (the Enter key). For First Available Point.

111

If this function sees a point number on the stack, it determines if a point is stored at that location. If it is stored, it searches forward to the first free point. If it is not stored, it searches backward until it finds the first free point after a stored point. The display should read 6-1-4 NN 11. This gives a Next Number of 11. This verifies that the last number used was 10. So the points you will transform are from point 1 to point 10. 2. Press <RPTS> . 3. Press <Esc> to remove the old random points file. Here you define all of the point numbers that will be translated. It is OK if you define points that have not been stored. They will be ignored. 4. Key in 1.10 and press ! (points 1 through 10 are to be transformed). 5. Tap <CX>. # If Elevations are turned off, the message WILL ERASE ELEV! displays. This indicates that the point transformed while Elevations are off will be given an elevation of 0.

Figure 4-53 Transformation Screen

6. Tap <NEZ>. 7. Key in the old incorrect point number (3) and tap <OLDPT>. 8. Press <NeXT> .

112

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-54 Coordinates of Point 3

9. Key in the new North coordinate of 12573465.122 and tap <NEWN>. 10. Key in the new East coordinate of 7442381.498 and tap <NEWE>.

Figure 4-55 New Coordinates of Point 3

11. Press <NeXT> <EXIT> <ROT> (for rotation). 12. Key in 3 <SPACE> 4 (the two points that define the old incorrect direction) and tap <OLD~>. 13. Key in the southeast bearing of 19.233 and convert it to an azimuth by pressing c <SE> (the 2 key). 14. Tap <NEW~>.

Figure 4-56 Converting to Azimuth

15. Tap <EXIT>. 16. Tap <SCALE>. A scale factor multiplies all distances in the random points file by whatever you set it to be. The number 1 is the default scale factor. ! The program puts an asterisk " * " before the distance to indicate that there is a scale factor being applied when you inverse any point in that points file. 17. Key in .3048006096 and press !. This is the new scale factor.

113

18. Tap <RUN>. The display shows DONE. 19. Press <Esc> to clear this message. 20. Press <VIEW> , key in 3, and tap <PNTS>.

Figure 4-57 Viewing the Coordinates of Point 3

21. Key in 3 <SPACE> 4 and press <PT-PT> .

Figure 4-58 Inversing from Point 3 to Point 4

The new direction is correct. The distance is in meters. If you were to continue working in this project in meters, press <CHG> <NeXT> <MODE> <FEET>. The <FEET> / <METR> soft key is a toggle for Feet / Meters mode. Whichever is displayed is the one that is active.

Staking Points
Using Figure 4-46 on page 107, you will now occupy 7, backsight 4, and stake points 1, 2, 3, and points along the curve from 7 to 9. 1. Press <SETUP> , key in 7, and tap <OCPY>. 2. Key in 4 and tap <BKPT>. 3. Press <STAKE> (Allegro O key, Titan P key, JETT S key).

114

SMI Version 8 User Guide

4. Key in 1 and tap <FSPT> (for foresight point, which is the point to be staked). Your display should now read 4-7-1 NN 11. The display now shows at a glance that you are sitting at 7, backsighting 4, the right angle to turn, and the distance to shoot to stake point 1. 5. Key in 2 and tap <FSPT>. 6. Key in 3 and tap <FSPT>.

Figure 4-59 Staking Points 1, 2, and 3

The above distances are in meters, since you performed the transformation, and may differ slightly from what you are showing on your screen. 7. Press <CHG> <NeXT> <MODE> <FEET> The Feet soft key toggles to <METR> and the display shows METER MODE, verifying that you are now in Meters mode. You will now compute the area. 8. Press <RPTS> . 9. Press <Esc> to clear the old data. 10. Key in 1.4 <SPACE> "7 <SPACE> 8 <SPACE> 9" <SPACE> 6 <SPACE> 1 !. Your entry should look like: 1.4 "7 8 9" 6 1 11. Tap <PREC>. 115

Figure 4-60 Computing the Area in Meters Mode

You will now return to JOB1 and work in Feet mode. 12. Press <JOB> <OLD> scroll to JOB1 and press ! <CHG> <NeXT> <MODE> <METR>. # Even though the job changed, the program was still working in Meters mode.

Figure 4-61 Area Computations

You will now stake the curve at 50-foot intervals. 1. Press <SETUP> 7 <OCPY> 4 <BKPT>. 2. Press <CURVE> (Allegro Q key, Titan R key, JETT a U). 3. Key in 24.1008 and tap <>. 4. Key in 513.83 and tap <R>. 5. Tap <RIGHT>.

116

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-62 Choosing the Side

6. Key in 0 and tap <STA>. 7. Key in 50 and tap <INC>. The increment is now 50. The default increment is 100. 8. Tap <INC> again. When you do this, the program advances 50 feet up the line, giving you the angle and distance to stake. ! Note that the station appears at the top of the SMI screen.

Figure 4-63 At Station 1+00

9. Tap <INC>. Again, it is 50 feet up the line.

Figure 4-64 At Station 1+50

The Curve Stakeout function increments to the PT, then starts over again. At any time, you can key in an offset distance and stake points on an offset from the centerline. To stake at an offset,

117

just key in the offset distance and tap <OFSET>. If the offset is to the left side of the curve, key in the offset distance and press a <+/-> (Allegro decimal key, Titan <BLUEKEY> <ESC> key, JETT Y key). You can also give a tangent length and get a tangent offset; an angle right, as well as an offset distance, is displayed. You must occupy the PC or PT and backsight a point on the tangent. ! If you have SMI Construction, you do not have to be on the PC or PT. You can do this routine from any location.

Working with Elevations

Flag Z at the top of the Setup screen indicates that elevations are on. This flag can be toggled on or off from the <CHG> menu. The shortcut is a <EL> (the 3 key; Labeled <ELEV> on the JETT) to toggle elevations on and off.

Figure 4-65 Flag Z (Elevations On / Elevations Off)

Since Elevations are on, the HI and ROD values are displayed for trig leveling purposes. Following are some examples of working with elevations. When the points were stored, Elevations were not turned on because the elevation information was not provided. An assumed elevation will now start on one point and use this point as a reference to store elevations on other points using trig leveling within SMI surveying software.

118

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-66 Elevation Points

Store an Assumed Elevation at Point 3

1. Press <STO PT> (Allegro P key, Titan Q key, JETT K key) (Store Coordinates). 2. Key in 3 and tap <RCLPT> (Recall Point). 3. Key in 100 and tap <EL> (Elevations). This turns Elevations on, even if they were off before.

Figure 4-67 Turning on Elevations

4. Key in 3 and tap <STORE>. You are prompted POINT 3 USED OVERWRITE POINT? 5. Press ! to overwrite.

119

Use Benchmark
It is not normally necessary to key in an HI and HROD. However, since you are asked to bring an elevation to the occupied point, it is necessary to key in the HI and HROD. First, measure the HI and HROD and key in these values into SMI. The HI = 5.25 and the HROD = 4.85. 1. Press <SETUP> . 2. Key in 5.25 and tap <H I>. 3. Key in 4.85 and tap <H ROD>. 4. Take a reading on the prism on point 3. If you are in Manual mode, you will use the angles and distance below from point 7 to 3: Horizontal Angle = 2984840 Zenith Angle = 8750 Slope Distance = 228.30 5. Press <SETUP> <NeXT> <BM>. 6. Key in 228.3 <SPACE> 87.5 <SPACE> 298.484 !.

Figure 4-68 Setting the Distance and Angle from Point 3 to Point 7
7. Key in 3 and tap <BMPT>. ! Point 3 had an elevation stored. If an elevation was not stored at point 3, you could have keyed in 100 (the elevation of point 3) and pressed <EL?>.

8. Key in 7 and tap <STORE>. You are prompted to overwrite the point. Overwriting the point does not change the North and East coordinates. It only inserts the correct elevation at point 7.

120

SMI Version 8 User Guide

9. Press ! to overwrite.

Figure 4-69 Setting Point 7

! If you see an angle here as your backsight, do not worry it is just the angle of point 3. Sometimes the point number will show as your backsight, and sometimes the angle will. You can now take side shots to the prism and collect north, east, and elevation values. If the rod height does not change, the elevations of the foresight points will be good elevations. If you wish to take side shots several hundred feet away and want the elevations to have high accuracy, you should use the <TRIG> functions. Press <SETUP> <NeXT> <NeXT> <TRIG>. The <TRIG> soft key takes a side shot like the <SIDS> function, except that it prompts for a REV (reverse reading) which means/averages the zenith angles. Direct and reverse are meaned and the vertical circle error of the instrument is nullified. See Trigonometric Leveling (Trig) in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information about this function.

One Optional Procedure for Trigonometric Leveling

1. Occupy and backsight a point. 2. Press <SETUP> then key in the occupied point number, and tap <OCPY>. 3. Key in the backsight point and tap <BKPT>. 4. Zero the instrument on the backsight point. 5. Take a reading on a benchmark. The benchmark can be the backsight point or any other point with a known or assumed elevation. 6. Press <SETUP> <NeXT> <BM>. The instrument takes a reading or prompts for the distance and angles from the instrument. 7. You now have an option of one of the following: A. Key in the known elevation of the benchmark and tap <EL?>. 121

B. Key in the point number of the benchmark that has the elevation and tap <BMPT>. C. Flop the scope and tap <REV>. This takes a reverse reading on the benchmark. You are now ready to do A or B above. Option C should be used when you need high accuracy and when the distances are longer than 300 feet. ! In this procedure, the height of instrument and height of rod values were not discussed. When you do not need the elevation of the point under the instrument, or you already have the elevation of the point under the instrument, you do not need to enter height of instrument and height of rod readings. ! You should be careful not to change the height of instrument and height of rod values after doing a benchmark. If you need to boot the rod, key in the difference in rod height using the <HROD> key.

Predetermined Area
There are two basic types of predetermined area, the Hinge method and the Slide method.

Hinge Method
Figure 4-70 on page 123, shows how to hold point 9 and create a point on the line between points 2 and 3 that produces a 1.5 acre parcel on the west side of the property. The points of this tract should first be stored. Make sure that points 9, 1, 2, and 3 are stored. Place the point numbers in the RPTS file. The first point should be the hinge point. The last two points should define the line on which the new point is to be placed. 1. Press <RPTS> . 2. Press <Esc> to clear the old data. 3. Key in 9 <SPACE> 1.3 and press !. 4. Press <NeXT> <NeXT> and <HINGE>. 5. Type 1.5 and tap <ACRES>. 6. Tap <STORE> to store the point at the next number position (or key in the point number before tapping <STORE>).

122

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-70 Predetermined Area Example

Check Location of Points Using Screen Plot

1. Press <RPTS> . 2. Press <Esc> to clear the old data. 3. Key in 1 <SPACE> 2 <SPACE> 10 <SPACE> 9 <SPACE> 6 then press !. 4. Tap <SPLOT>. The <LINE> key toggles on and off drawing lines. (The <PT#> soft key does the same thing with the point numbers). 5. Tap <LINE> to toggle off drawing lines. 6. Tap <SPLOT>. Remember that this only shows the points that are in the random points file, even though there may be more points in the job.

Figure 4-71 Screen Plot

Points 1 and 6 are very close together, so 6 looks distorted. Point 10 is the one that was created to create the 1.5-acre area. 123

7. Press <Esc> to return to the screen plot screen.

Slide Method
Now you will create a 1-acre tract on the west side. However, the bearing on the east side of the 1-acre lot is N 1500 E. This will create two more points on the defined line and slide them in or out to create the exact acreage given. ! You cannot slide on a curve. 1. Press <MORE> (Allegro T key, Jett O key) 2. Press <NeXT> <PREA> <SLIDE>. 3. Key in 1 and tap <PT1> for point 1. 4. Key in 1 <SPACE> 9 and tap <AZ1> for azimuth 1. 5. Key in 2 and tap <PT2> for point 2. 6. Key in 2 <SPACE> 3 and tap <AZ2> for azimuth 2.

Figure 4-72 Azimuth 2

7. Key in 15.0 and tap <SLDAZ>. 8. Key in 1 and tap <ACRES>. This means we are creating a 1 acre area.

Figure 4-73 Resultant Distances

124

SMI Version 8 User Guide

9. Key in 13 and tap <PT3>. If the next number is 13, keying in the point number first is not necessary. 10. Key in 14 and tap <PT4>. The points at the computed corners are stored. 11. Check the area by pressing <RPTS> . 12. Press <Esc> to clear out the old data. 13. Key in 13 <SPACE> 1 <SPACE> 2 <SPACE> 14 and press !. 14. Tap <AREA>.

Figure 4-74 Area Verification

You should see ACRES = 1.0000. You can also check to see the points location by tapping <SPLOT> <SPLOT>.

Sunshots
The Sunshots routine lets you take a sunshot or calculate a previous sunshot. This function is available on all of SMIs programs. The Sunshots routine uses the local hour angle method with built-in ephemeris, which requires the use of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This method is generally accepted as the most accurate method of determining north from the sun. ! GMT, as used in this manual, is equivalent to UT1 time. National Bureau of Standards Time, WWV, and WWVH announce UTC time and the double ticks to adjust to UT1 time. UT1 time is based on the Earths rotation. When double ticks are immediately after the tone, add one tenth of a second per double tick. Subtract one tenth of a second per double tick when the double ticks are nine seconds after the tone. 125

It is absolutely essential that you use a solar filter when taking readings on the sun. Without a filter, you will only get two attempts at a sunshot: one with the right eye, the other with the left eye! Also note that the sun will ruin a diode in a total station EDM unless you have installed a sun filter in front of the lens.

Setting Time within SMI

If you are working with sunshots, it is of particular importance that your data collector be set to the correct time. To set or change the current time within SMI: 1. Select File > Settings. 2. Make sure Authentic 48 Speed is checked on. 3. Exit SMI. Double click on the time displayed on the Windows task bar. ! For some data collectors you must use the devices control panel. For the Titan you must be in Administrator Mode. If prompted for a password type YIWT . The Date/Time Properties dialog box displays.

Figure 4-75 Date/Time Properties

4. Verify or set the correct time.

126

SMI Version 8 User Guide

5. Close the Date/Time Properties dialog box. 6. Start Classic SMI.

How to Check the Current Time

For taking sunshot readings using SMI, it is essential that you accurately set your time to Greenwich Mean Time. This is generally broadcast from the Naval Observatory in Washington, DC. You may call the US Naval Observatorys Master Clock for a recorded time announcement. Time is broadcast in universal time and EST (adjust for your local time zone) and includes a beep every five seconds for accurate time synchronization. US Naval Observatory Master Clock: (202) 762-1401. There are also numerous low cost clocks which are synchronized with Naval Observatory Time.

An Example of Setting and Adjusting Time

When you call the US Naval Observatory Master Clock, you will hear something like this: (202) 7621401; U.S. Naval Observatory Master Clock at the tone, Eastern Standard Time, 9 hours, 2 minutes, 45 seconds, Universal Time 13 hours, 2 minutes, 50 seconds. Key in approximately 1 minute ahead of the Universal Time. When the time gets to 13 hours, 3 minutes, 50 seconds, at the tone press OK. The time displays in the Windows title bar.

Determining Astronomic Azimuth

This is an example using a 10-second theodolite and a Casio wristwatch for reading the time. The location for this sunshot is northeast Tennessee. The latitude of the instrument position is 363339 and the longitude is 823411. A backsight reading was taken on a church steeple and it was set at 0.0000. The data collector was set to Greenwich Meridian Time. Readings were taken to the nearest half second and the time and horizontal circle reading to the sun was recorded. The date was 17 November 1994; the time was a little after 4:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time just past 21 hours Greenwich Meridian Time. Using the time and circle readings to the sun, the Grid Azimuth was computed from the instrument to the church steeple. The data for November 17, 1994: EST 4:0649 Circle Reading to the Sun 925535 GMT 21:0649

127

4:0718.5 4:0750.5 4:0819.5

930050 930623 931120

21:0718.5 21:0750.5 21:0819.5

If you are manually keying in the data for this example, select <MAN1> from the Instruments menu. (If you are in the field with an instrument selected, the program automatically pulls the data from the instrument). Even though this example is old, it will still work in the program. 1. Press <MORE> <NeXT> <SUN> (Press the c Y on the JETT). The Sunshots menu displays. 2. Enter the date (November 17, 1994) using the format MM.DDYYYY; key in 11.171994 and tap <date>. The date now appears in the display. You will now enter the latitude and longitude for your position. These keys are on the second soft key menu screen. 3. Press <NeXT> . Latitude and longitude are entered using the format DD.MMSS. Use a decimal to separate degrees from the minutes and seconds. 4. Enter the latitude (36 33 39) by keying in 36.3339 and tapping <lat>. The latitude appears in the display. 5. Enter the longitude (823411) by keying in 82.3411 and tapping <long>. The longitude appears in the display.

Figure 4-76 Latitude and Longitude Displayed

6. Press <NeXT> to return to the first soft key menu screen.

128

SMI Version 8 User Guide

You will now enter the Greenwich Meridian Time (GMT) for this observation (21:06 and 49 seconds) 7. Key in 21.0649 and tap <time>. Even though you need to enter the time in military time, it might show up on the screen with a P for PM or A for AM in Standard Time. It depends on your data collector settings. The time is shown in the display.

Figure 4-77 Time Display

CSUN is simply the horizontal angle to the sun. If you are using electronic data collection with an instrument selected, and tap <csun>, the horizontal angle to the sun is collected automatically. You may enter the circle reading to the sun and time in any order. Complete the steps below to enter the circle readings to the sun. 8. Tap <csun>. <csun> is different than most soft keys. It requires that you tap the soft key before typing the number. 9. Enter the circle reading to the sun (925535) by keying in 92.5535 .

Figure 4-78 Horizontal Circle to the Sun

10. Tap <run>.

129

Figure 4-79 Astronomic Azimuth Computation

The program computes the Astronomic Azimuth from the instrument to the backsight. Also note that the <run> key has changed to <rep> (repeat). This simply allows you to repeat the calculations for further readings to be figured into the average. Now enter the second set of readings: a circle reading to the sun of 930055 taken at 21:0718.5 GMT. 11. Key in 21.07185 on the command line and tap <time>. 12. Tap <csun>, key in 93.005, and press !. 13. Tap <rep>. The program displays the new Astronomic Azimuth calculated, as well as the new average:

ASTRONOMIC AZIMUTHS SET 2: 141 43 31 AVERAGE: 141 43 35

Finish this exercise with the remaining readings. The third reading (930623) was taken at 21:0750.5 GMT. 14. Key in 21.07505 and tap <time>. 15. Tap <csun>, key in 93.0623, and press !. 16. Tap <rep> to begin the calculations.

130

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The display shows the Astronomic Azimuth for reading 3, as well as the average for the three readings:

ASTRONOMIC AZIMUTHS SET 3: 141 43 31 AVERAGE 141 43 33

The fourth reading (931120) was taken at 21:0819.5 GMT. 17. Key in 21.08195 and tap <time>. 18. Tap <csun>, key in 93.1120, and press !. 19. Tap <rep>. The display shows the Astronomic Azimuth for reading 4, and the average for the four readings:

ASTRONOMIC AZIMUTHS SET3: 141 43 35 AVERAGE 141 43 34

Determining Grid Azimuth

Take the same data used in Determining Astronomic Azimuth on page 127, except now you will calculate Grid Azimuth. Grid Azimuth requires State Plane Grid Constants. This data is provided in State Plane Grid Constants, listed by zone. The State Plane Grid Constants for the example in Tennessee are as follows: Central Longitude: 860000 Zone Constant: 0.585440 First, it is necessary to enter these values. 1. Press <MORE> <NeXT> <SUN> (Press the c Y on the JETT). This clears the previous results and changes the <rep> soft key back to <run>. 2. Press <NeXT> .

131

This scrolls the Sunshots soft key menu to the second screen. 3. Enter the central longitude onto the command line by keying in 86.0000 (the zeroes after the decimal point are optional) and tapping <c.l.>. The display shows the central longitude. Note that the last values entered are still kept in the memory. That means you do not need to re-enter the date, time, or latitude/longitude for this example. 4. Next, enter the zone constant. Key in 0.585440 and tap <z.c.>. The display now shows both central longitude and zone constant. Next, re-enter the four circle readings to the sun (and their respective times). Reading #1 was 925535 taken at 21:0649 GMT. 5. Press <NeXT> to get back to the first sunshots soft key menu. 6. Key in 21.0649 and tap <time>. 7. Tap <csun>, key in 92.5537, and press !.

Figure 4-80 Grid Azimuth Computation

8. Tap <run>. The display shows:

GRID AZIMUTHS SET 1: 139 43 07 AVERAGE: 139 43 07

Since you entered the Tennessee State Plane Grid Constants, the display shows the Tennessee State Plane Grid Azimuth. Also note that, just as with our previous example, the <run> soft key has changed to <rep> (repeat), allowing you to take additional readings to compute an average Grid Azimuth. 132 SMI Version 8 User Guide

Reading #2 was 930050 taken at 21:0718.5 GMT. 9. Key in 21.07185 and tap <time>. 10. Tap <csun>, key in 93.0050, and press !. 11. Tap <rep>. The display shows:

GRID AZIMUTHS SET 2: 139 43 01 AVERAGE: 139 43 04

Reading #3 was 930623 taken at 21:0750.5 GMT. 12. Key in 21.07505 and tap <time>. 13. Tap <csun>, key in 93.0623, and press !. 14. Tap <rep>. The display shows:

GRID AZIMUTHS SET 3: 139 43 01 AVERAGE: 139 43 03

The display shows the Grid Azimuth for this reading, as well as an updated average Grid Azimuth reflecting the three readings. Reading #4 was 931120 and was taken at 21:0819.5 GMT. 15. Key in 21.08195 and tap <time>. 16. Tap <csun>, key in 93.1120, and press !. 17. Tap <rep>. The display shows:

GRID AZIMUTHS

133

SET 4:

139 43 05

AVERAGE: 139 43 04
! The average Grid Azimuth did not change between the third and fourth readings. This is because the readings were so close that they had little effect on the average. As you can see, the Sunshots routine is a fast and relatively simple way to calculate the direction of a line.

Stake to a Point
1. Press <SETUP> (Allegro F key, Titan G key, JETT J key), key in the occupied point number, and tap <OCPY>. 2. Key in the backsight point and tap <BKPT>. 3. Press <STAKE> (Allegro O key, Titan P key, JETT S key), key in the point to be staked, and tap <FSPT>.

Figure 4-81 Stake to a Point Example

The angle to turn and the distance from the instrument are shown. If you have the Turn to Foresight (FS) option turned on in the Robot menu and your instrument has servo motors, the instrument will turn to the foresight. As you take sample readings using a prism on a pole, the screen shows two options that the rodman needs to walk to find the point: Go or Come: This option gives you the Go or Come distances and Right or Left distances until you feel OK about the position (this is the rodman's right, not the instrument's right.) CLK: This option shows a clock direction in which the rodman should walk for a specific distance. The clock direction assumes that toward the instrument is 12:00. For example, five

134

SMI Version 8 User Guide

o'clock for 5.72 feet means that the rodman should walk away from the instrument and slightly to the instrument man's left for 5.72 feet. If Elevations are on, you are given Cut or Fill values, as well.

Example

Figure 4-82 Stake Points Illustration

This example will have the instrument set up on point one, backsighting point 2, and will stake point 9. 1. Press <SETUP> 1 <OCPY> 2 <BKPT>. 2. Press <STAKE> . 3. Key in 9 and tap <FSPT>.

Figure 4-83 Staking Point 9

This shows the exact distance and angle to travel to reach point number 9 from point 1 backsighting 2. 4. Send the rodman to the approximate position and tap <SHOT>. 135

Actually, you have two options. The easiest thing to do might just be to turn your instrument to the appropriate angle, have your rodman line up in the sights, then tap <HDIST> or <SDIST>. This provides you with a Go or Come distance on that line. For this example, you will use <SHOT> instead. 5. Key in the information from the instrument. If you are hooked up to a total station, the information in the gun automatically transfers to the data collector. However, you may also enter the information manually.

Figure 4-84 Slope Distance, Zenith Angle, Angle Right

The information displayed includes the slope distance, zenith angle, and angle right separated by a space. 6. Key in 332.2500 <SPACE> 90 <SPACE> 81.0550 and press !.

Figure 4-85 Rodman Options

The screen now shows two options that the rodman needs to walk: Go or Come/Left or Right: This example shows that the point is 5.52 feet away from the prism and 1.54 feet to the right (this is the rodman's right, not the instrument's right.) CLK: This example shows the direction the rodman should walk 5 oclock is shown, with a distance of 5.74 feet. Use whatever makes sense to your rodman.

This routine can be done as many times as necessary to position the prism on top of the point desired by simply tapping <SHOT>.

136

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Notice that Cut and Grade were not discussed. That is because a zenith angle of 90 (or flat) was used. A different zenith angle or elevation will now be used with the same distance and angle right to show the cut and fill features of the Stake routine. 7. Press <STAKE> 9, then <FSPT>. 8. Press <NeXT> , then type the elevation at which you want the point being staked to be (in this example, key in 100), and tap <FSEL> for foresight elevation. (Note that if you had elevations off in previous examples, you may omit this step.) If you were staking out the foundation of a warehouse, you would want the elevation to be the same as the point you are occupying at the instrument. The elevation of the occupied point in this example is 100 feet. 9. Press <NeXT> until you see <SHOT>, then tap <SHOT>. 10. Enter the same distance and angle right, but make the zenith angle 91.3007, by entering 332.2500 <SPACE> 91.3007 <SPACE> 81.0550, then pressing !.

Figure 4-86 Point 9 Staked

Fill shows that 8.71 feet of earth will need to be added to the point to bring the elevation where it needs to be. Grade shows what the point needs to be. Shot shows the current elevation of the prism. If the elevation exceeded 100 feet, in the place of Fill would be the word Cut to show how much dirt would need to be removed to make the elevation correct. Notice also that the distances are slightly different than the example where the point was already flat. The program compensates for the slope of the ground as well.

137

Stake to a Line

Figure 4-87 Stake to a Line

1. Press <SETUP> , key in the occupied point number, and tap <OCPY>. 2. Key in the backsight point and tap <BKPT>. 3. Press <STAKE> , key in a point number, press <SPACE> , key in another point number that is on the line to be staked, and tap <FSPT>. As you take sample readings using <SHOT>, you are given Go or Come distances, Right or Left distances, and perpendicular distances (PERPO) until you feel OK about the position. If Elevations are on, you are given Cut or Fill values based on the slope between the points. Another way to start the Stake to a Line routine is to press <STAKE> (Allegro O key, Titan P key, Jett S key) <NEXT> <NEXT> <STKL>.

Stake to a Curve Using the Stake Command

1. Press <SETUP> , key in the occupied point number, and tap <OCPY>. 2. Key in the backsight point and tap <BKPT>. 3. Press <STAKE> , key in the PC <SPACE> <radius point>, <SPACE> , PT of the curve to be staked, and tap <fspt>. If the PC is point 7, the radius point is point 8, and the PT is point 9, the display should read: 7 8 9.

138

SMI Version 8 User Guide

4. Tap <fspt>. As you take sample readings using <shot>, you are given Go or Come distances, Right or Left distances, and perpendicular distances (PERPO) until you feel OK about the position. If Elevations are on, you are given Cut or Fill values based on the slope along the curve from the PC to the PT.

Stake to a Curve Using the Stake to a Curve Command

This procedure allows you to take shots and find out how close you are to a curve. It also interpolates the elevation along the curve between the PC and PT points to create a grade elevation at any point along the curve. If you are following the examples, 2 is our occupied point and 3 is our backsight point. 1. Press <SETUP> 2 <OCPY> 3 <BKPT>. 2. Press <STAKE> <NeXT> <NeXT> <sTKC> or <STAKE> <fspt> You are prompted for the PC, RP, and PT. 3. Key in 7 8 9 and press !. You are now ready to take a shot near the curve. 4. Tap <SHOT> and take the measurement. Since we are in manual mode, key in 475.5

90.0001 30.0000

Figure 4-88 Enter Shot for Staking to Curve

139

A screen display similar to the figure below displays.

Figure 4-89 Stake to a Curve Measurement

This screen indicates that the curve you are staking is defined by points 7, 8, and 9. The first shot is 1.19 feet away from the curve (PERPO). To stake the curve, the rodman can move away from the instrument 1.97 feet or move 1.50 feet to his left. The grade is the elevation on the curve perpendicular to the shot. The rodman should measure over 1.50 feet to his left as he faces the instrument, and the instrument man should take another reading. ! The keys in the Stake to a Curve menu work just like the keys in the main Stake menu.

Stake to Points in the Random Points File

1. Press <RPTS> , key in the point numbers you wish to stake, and press !. 2. Press <STAKE> and c <FSPT>. You are given the angle and distance to get to the first point in the Random Points file. 3. Tap <SHOT> to take sample readings. 4. When finished staking the first point, press c <FSPT> to stake the next point in the Random Points file. To increment backward in the Random Points file, use a <FSPT>.

Staking Shortcuts Using Random Points

There are a couple timesaving functions in the Random Points file ( <RPTS> ) that are designed to automate the staking routine. One is the Note Search function and the other is the <STAK> function, both within the Random Points menu. These functions can be used separately or in conjunction with each other to make the staking of points more streamlined. In this example, you will use them in conjunction with each other. This function searches the points entered in the Random Points file and builds a new Random Points file based on the note you want to stake. 140 SMI Version 8 User Guide

The <STAK> function searches the Random Points file for points within a given distance from the occupied point. The resulting Random Points file can be sorted by distance or direction (angle). As an example, suppose that you want to stake all the IPS (Iron Pin Set) points in sequence from your occupied point 4. You should go to the Random Points menu and enter the points or range of points to be staked. In this example, you will enter a range of points and let the software pick out the IPS points. 1. Press <RPTS> , key in 1.10, and press !. 2. Press <NeXT> <NeXT> <NOTE>. You are prompted for the note to search for. 3. Type IPS and press !. 4. Press <RPTS> again. The Random Points file has been changed to include only (1 2 8 9 and 10), the points that have the note IPS. (if you did not store coordinates with notes, you may enter 1 2 8 9 10 in a new <RPTS> file). Next you will stake all the points within 500 feet of the occupied point. 5. Press <RPTS> and press !, since you already have the IPS points listed. 6. Press <NeXT> <NeXT> <STAK>. You are prompted to enter the maximum distance to stake. 7. Key in 500 and press !. You are prompted to choose whether to sort by distance or angle. 8. Answer <YES> to sort by distance instead of angle. If you want to sort by angle, answer <NO> and it begins with the point closest to the last staked angle. Since you are staking using the Distance mode, the program stakes the points in order of their distance away from the occupied point. In this example, your new Random Points file will be 8 9 10 1 2. All other points have been filtered out.

141

Figure 4-90 Stake Points Example

Now you will find the points that are within a certain range of the occupied point and stake them. 9. Press <RPTS> and key in the points through which you want to search. Blank points are ignored. 10. Press ! <NeXT> <NeXT> <STAK>. You are prompted for the maximum distance to stake. 11. Key in a distance (e.g., 300) and press !. You are prompted: Sort by Distance Instead of Angle 12. For Distance, tap <YES>; for Angles, tap <NO>. 13. Press <RPTS> . The points that were within the specified distance are displayed. 14. Press <Esc> <Esc> to exit. You are ready to press <STAKE> and use c <FSPT> to stake each point.

Staking by Station (STA) and Offsets

It is possible to stake individual lines and curves by station and offset without the Construction (CVE) program. Construction adds the ability to define a series of lines, curves, and spirals in horizontal control, vertical control, and templates. See Construction, which begins on page 191, for information on how to use this program.

142

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Line Stakeout
1. Press <STAKE> <NeXT> <NeXT> <LINE>. You are prompted for the beginning point (BegPT), beginning station (BegSTA), and ending point (EndPT). 2. Key in these values separated by a space and press !. The very top of the screen displays the station and offset. Below is the elevation, backsight, occupying point, station, then the next number. To stake it out, follow the distance and right angle information. ! To change to the next station, tap <STA>.

Curve Stakeout
1. Press <STAKE> (Allegro O key, Titan P key) <NeXT> <NeXT> <CurvE>. On the JETT you can simply press a U. 2. You are prompted for the radius, delta, and beginning station (BegSTA). Key in these values separated by a space and press !. ! Note that if the curve is going to the left, the radius needs a - in front of it. The information displayed resembles the information given for Line Stakeout. ! To change to the next station, tap <STA>.

143

Multiple Sets of Angles to Multiple Points

Figure 4-91 Multiple Angles to Multiple Points

There are two methods of manually entering multiple angles to multiple shots as explained below. Both methods can increase your accuracy by averaging multiple shots for you.

Multiple Angle Method 1

1. Set up on a known point. 2. Press <SHOTS> (Allegro M key, Titan N key, JETT c then the T key). The Shots menu displays 3. Zero on the backsight and tap <BS>. ! In Manual mode, you are prompted for the zenith and right angles. 4. Turn to each foresight point and tap <SHOT>. ! In Manual mode, you are prompted for the slope distance, zenith angle, and right angles or circle. Remember to key in these numbers separated by a space. You can have one or many foresight points. 5. Flop the scope and take reverse readings by tapping <SHOT> after each point. At the backsight, tap <BS>.

144

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Example: If you shot the points in the order of backsight point, 6, 7, 8, after you flop the scope, your reverse order should be 8,7,6, backsight.

Multiple Angle Method 2

1. Set up on a known point. 2. Press <SHOTS> . The Shots menu displays 3. Zero on the backsight and tap <BS>. 4. Flop the scope and tap <BS> again. ! In Manual mode, you are prompted for the slope distance, zenith angle, and right angles or circle. Remember to key in these numbers separated by a space. 5. Turn to each foresight point and take a shot in the reverse and direct positions before you go to the next foresight point. You may be prompted to key in a point number before you tap <SHOT>. SMI detects whether the instrument is direct or inverted automatically. 6. Tap <SET1> and it increments to <SET2>. 7. Repeat Method 1 or 2. 8. Take all of the sets you desire. Go to any set by keying in a set number and tapping the SET soft key (1, 2, 3, etc.). 9. To evaluate the set, tap <EVAL>. 10. In the <EVAL> menu, tap <SHOW> and the angles to each point are displayed. Tap <SHOW> again to see the angles for the next point. To see a specific point number, key in the point number before tapping <SHOW>. 11. To find the error, tap <ERROR>. Tap <ERROR> again to see the error for the next point. To see a specific point number, key in the point number before tapping <ERROR>. 12. Reshoot any point in any position of any set by keying in the proper set number and tapping the SET soft key (1, 2, 3, etc.), turning the instrument to the proper face position (direct or reverse), and keying in the proper point number before tapping <STPTS>. 13. When satisfied with the results, tap <STORE> in the <EVAL> menu. 145

The meaned point(s) are stored as side shots. 14. If you wish to traverse to one of the stored points, press <ALPHA> (Allegro Ins key, Titan key, Jett and press P), type PTRVR, and press . . Now key in the point number of the traverse

If there is only one point being stored, you are asked to indicate whether it is a side shot or traverse point. If some readings have been taken but not stored, pressing <SETUP> <NeXT> <SHOTS> does not clear the old values. To clear old values, press <SETUP> <NeXT> c <SHOTS>. Once the points have been stored, pressing <SETUP> <NeXT> <SHOTS> clears the old shots data. If you wish to retain the shots data in variables after shots are stored, press <SETUP> <NeXT> a <SHOTS>.

Shots Routine Using an Instrument

Figure 4-92 Multiple Angles to Multiple Points

In the above illustration, you are occupying point 1, backsighting point 2, and taking readings on points 3, 4, and 5. It is assumed that you have created a job and points 1 and 2 are stored. 1. Press <SETUP> 1 <OCPY> 2 <BKPT>. 2. Press <SHOTS> . 146 SMI Version 8 User Guide

3. With the instrument in the direct position, sight the instrument on the backsight point (2). 4. Zero the instrument (optional). 5. Tap <BS> (if you zeroed on the backsight point, this is optional). 6. Sight the instrument on point 3 and tap <SHOT>. 7. Sight the instrument on point 4 and tap <SHOT>. 8. Sight the instrument on point 5 and tap <SHOT>. The minimum number of foresight points is one. For example, you could have stopped at point 3 in this example. There is no limit to the number of foresight points that can be used. You are using three foresight points in this example. 9. Reverse the scope, sight the instrument on point 5, and tap <SHOT>. 10. With the instrument reversed, sight the instrument on point 4 and tap <SHOT>. 11. Sight the instrument on point 3 and tap <SHOT>. 12. Sight the instrument on point 2 and tap <BS>. You have finished set 1. 13. To take another set, key in 2 and <SET1>, or just tap <SET1> and the soft key increments to <SET2>. You are now ready to repeat the steps for set 1. 14. Point the instrument in the direct position and sight the instrument on point 2 and tap <BS>. 15. Sight the instrument on point 3 and tap <SHOT>. 16. Sight the instrument on point 4 and tap <SHOT>. 17. Sight the instrument on point 5 and tap <SHOT>. 18. Reverse the scope, sight the instrument on point 5, and tap <SHOT>. 19. With the instrument reversed, sight the instrument on point 4 and tap <SHOT>. 20. Sight the instrument on point 3 and tap <SHOT>.

147

21. Sight the instrument on point 2 and tap <BS>. You have taken two sets. If you wish to take more sets, repeat the procedure described above, except the next set will be set 3, then set 4, etc. You will stop at set 2 for this example. 22. To evaluate the set, tap <EVAL>. 23. Tap <SHOW>. The angles to each point are displayed. 24. To see a specific point number, key in the point number before tapping <SHOW>. To find the error, tap <ERROR>. 25. Reshoot any point in any position of any set by keying in the proper set number and tapping the SET soft key (1, 2, 3, etc.), turning the instrument to the proper face position (direct or reverse), and keying in the proper point number before tapping <SHOT>. 26. When satisfied with the results, tap <STORE>. The meaned point(s) are stored as side shots. 27. If you wish to traverse to one of the stored points, press <ALPHA> , type PTRVR, and press ! (Jett P). Now key in the point number of the traverse and press !.

If some readings have been taken but not stored, pressing <SETUP> <NeXT> <SHOTS> does not clear the old values. To clear old values, press <SETUP> <NeXT> c <SHOTS>. 28. Once shots have been stored, pressing <SETUP> <NeXT> <SHOTS> clears the old shots data. If you wish to retain shots data in variables after shots are stored, press <SETUP> <NeXT> a <SHOTS>. Additional Flexibility of the Shots Program Tapping <SHOT> then <SET> takes multiple direct sets without taking reverse readings. Zero the instrument on the backsight without taking a backsight reading. When taking multiple sets to multiple points, you are prompted with the set you are on and the point number to be read next for direct and also for reverse.

148

SMI Version 8 User Guide

When you store the point or points and go back to the Shots program, the variables are zeroed out. However, if you press a <SHOTS>, SMI leaves the variables unchanged, even though the points have been stored.

Storing Elevations at Known North and East Points

The STOEL function is valuable for getting elevations on points in remote or hazardous places. To access, press <STAKE> <NeXT> <STOEL>. This function can be used for finding elevations on a highway with heavy traffic, or for locating elevations on buildings. You can compute x and y points along the edge of pavement or the centerline of pavement, then use STOEL to store the elevations of these points.

Conditions Necessary to Use the STOEL Function

A point must be stored north and east coordinates are all that is necessary to be stored with the point. STOEL works in SMIs Stake program. The purpose is to store an elevation with the coordinates using the horizontal crosshair on the instrument.

Figure 4-93 Establishing Unknown Elevation from Point with Known Coordinates
In the above illustration, the unknown elevation can be established by pointing the horizontal crosshair on the desired point if the following conditions exist: 1. The instrument must be occupying a known point stored in the current job or a stored or unstored free station. 2. A good elevation must be at the instrument. One of the following methods can be used for a good elevation at the instrument: A. If the instrument point has a good elevation stored with the point number under the instrument, you can measure up from this point and enter this distance as the HI value in SMI. Press <SETUP> <HI>.

149

B. The best way to get a good elevation at the instrument is to take a benchmark reading on a prism at a benchmark. For this to work properly, measure the distance from the bottom of the prism rod to the center of the prism and key in this value as the <HROD> under <SETUP> in SMI. You can now get the elevation of a stored north and east point with or without a prism.

How to Get the Elevation of a Point with a Prism

1. Use the same prism that you used to shoot the benchmark. 2. Set the prism over the point and press <STAKE> . 3. Key in the point number of the point at which you want the elevation stored. 4. Tap <FSPT> and turn to the prism at the point. 5. Press <NeXT> and tap <STOEL>. This stores the correct elevation of the point.

Figure 4-94 Storing the Correct Elevation of a Point

How to Get the Elevation of a Point without a Prism

1. Measure and key in the HROD. 2. Shoot a benchmark. 3. Press <STAKE> . 4. Key in the point number of the point at which you want the elevation stored, then turn the angle specified. 5. Tap <FSPT>.

150

SMI Version 8 User Guide

SMI displays the angle to turn to the point. 6. Turn the horizontal angle to the point. 7. Move the horizontal crosshair to the desired place for the elevation to be stored. 8. Press <NeXT> <STOEL>. This stores the elevation of the crosshair position with the coordinates of the point.

Free Station Resection Explanation

Free Station Resection establishes an occupied point based on sighting two known points referred to as points A and B. The program works as though you were occupying A, backsighting B, and traversing to a third point (the instrument position). Therefore, the more accurate position should be A. Point B can be considered a good backsight point from A (on the line from A). If the Scale option is used, a scale factor is applied, giving A and B equal weight. If you are using State Plane Coordinates, the instrument position is a State Plane Coordinate and future shots from this free station position are stored as State Plane Coordinates. References to slope staking or station and offset or cross-sections may only be available in Construction. SMIs Resection program has always been a true Free Station program with a high degree of accuracy, without a need to be concerned with the strength of the triangles. However, just as you would not want a short backsight, you would want to avoid too short a distance between the two control points from which you are free stationing.

151

Free Station Resection Example

Go to the field and arbitrarily level your instrument over an unknown position in view of points 1, 3, and 5 (the PI), which are existing points.

Figure 4-95 Free Station Resection

1. Sight the prism at point 1. This is the direction A shot. 2. Press <2PFS> (Allegro H key, Titan I key, JETT c then Z) <A DIR>. 3. If you are prompted for POINT A, key in 1 and press !. Here are the field angles and distance (in the circled area in the drawing above) from the instrument to point 1 where the prism is sighted: Slope Distance = 202.47 Zenith Angle = 8930 Circle = 00000 4. Key in 202.47 <SPACE> 89.30 <SPACE> 0 and press !.

152

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-96 Free Station Point A

Now the rodman takes the prism to point number 3. 5. Key in 3 and tap <B DIR>. This is the information for direct B from the gun while shooting the prism at point number 3. 6. Key in the instrument data: 426.30 <SPACE> 90.45 <SPACE> 180.1303 !.

Figure 4-97 Free Station Point B

7. Tap <RSLTS>.

Figure 4-98 Free Station Precision

You see a good precision (PREC: 26970). The precision is the distance between the control points divided by the error. With a precision of 26970 you would expect to be off 1 foot if you traveled 26970 feet. The higher this number is, the more precise your work is. If you see a small precision such as from 1 to 10, you did something wrong. Less than 1000 means that the work is not very good. Greater than 10000 is normally acceptable. Greater than 40000 is great. Greater than 100000 is luck.

153

8. If the NN is 15, tap <STORE>, and point 15 is stored. Or key in 15 before tapping <STORE>, which ensures that the coordinates will be stored at point 15. Storing the free station point number is optional. Even if you do not store the point, the coordinates are still occupied by SMI so that you can stake or collect from this instrument position. However, if the point is not stored by point number, when you traverse, occupy another point, or perform a free station resection again, the free station coordinates are lost. In many instances, you will not want to clutter your point numbers with free station points. The purpose of free stationing is not normally to find the instrument position, but to use the instrument position to collect or stake other points. You will now use points 1 and 5 as control points. Keep the old reading to A (point 1) and give B a new point number and new data. To reenter the program without losing the previous data entered, press <NeXT> . Now you can enter new information for B. ! If you leave the program and go back by pressing <NeXT> <2PFS>, you will need to re-enter and reshoot the points to define A direction and B direction. 9. Key in 5 and tap <B DIR>. 10. Key in 279.82 <SPACE> 90.0001 <SPACE> 224.13 and press !. 11. Tap <RSLTS>. Your precision should be 53109. 12. Tap 16, then <STORE>. Now check the inverse between 15 and 16. 13. Key in 15 <SPACE> 16 and press <PT-PT> . You get 0.0043 ft., which is very close. ! Free stationing to a third point is a good way to check the first two points. Another way to check for a good instrument position is to stake to a known point. When doing free station resection, it is possible to reverse points A and B and still get a great precision. If this happens, your instrument position will not even be close. For this reason, check yourself by staking to a third point or resecting to a third point. You will now mean points 15 and 16 for practice. 14. Press <RPTS> (Allegro S key, Titan T key, JETT N key).

154

SMI Version 8 User Guide

15. Key in 15 <SPACE> 16 and press !. 16. Press <NeXT> . 17. Tap <MEAN>. 18. Tap <STORE>. The mean is stored at point 17. This is the point you will want to use if you need to access points 15 or 16.

Figure 4-99 Mean Points Screen

You can also stake to a point, line, or curve from the free station point. This means that you do not have to set up on a known point to do your staking work. This saves you the time of setting up your instrument right over a point that might be difficult to find in the first place.

Trial Run with Data Collection

Figure 4-100 Data Collection Example

Please use this data as a working reference only to help you become familiar with the operation of your SMI program and your data collector device; of course, your field results will be unique to your job.

155

If you would like to follow this example using the actual raw data that was gathered, switch from electronic to manual data entry by pressing a 5 to enter Manual mode. The I at the top of the display should disappear. Then, key in the raw data for each point. Establish and occupy your first point. 1. Start a new job by pressing <JOB> <NEW> <NEW>. Give your job a name, then press !. 2. Press <CHG> (Jett W, Allegro B) and hit <note> until the display reads PROMPTING WITH

LAST NOTE.
3. Set up your instrument in the field over a known point, identified as point 1. (Or mark a point with a hub and tack). 4. Next, point the instrument at a backsight point and zero the instrument. For most instruments, you can zero the instrument from SMI using <SETUP> <NeXT> <zero> (or use a shortcut by pressing c then the 0 number key). 5. Press <SETUP> <NeXT> <NeXT> <BKBR> (back bearing). This step is optional. It places the backsight bearing in the raw data. If you know the direction to the backsight, key it in. In this example, assume that direction is S 15 W. 6. Key in 15 and press !. The display prompts: QUADRANT? 7. Key in the quadrant number, in this case, 3 (for SW). Then press !. The display returns you to the Setup screen.

Figure 4-101 Setup Screen

Next, you will take a shot on the backpoint (point 2).

156

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-102 Taking a Shot on the Backpoint

8. Put the rodman at point 2; mark point 2 with a hub and tack (or nail) and point the prism. 9. To take a side shot, press <SIDS> (Allegro J key, Titan K key, JETT M key). The display reads: MEASURING The instrument takes the reading and prompts with: NOTE FOR POINT 2. You may use up to 256 characters for your note. This may include an abbreviated description or a code to help you identify this point. This is where you might key in a code that your PC program needs to perform an auto-draw function. See the note tables in the SMI Transfer manual for a better description of this feature. For manual entry, you need to key in: Angle Right = 0 Zenith Angle = 93.2535 Slope Distance = 96.22 10. For notes, we are set to PROMPTING WITH LAST NOTE. You may have a note in the display. If this is the case, press <Esc> to clear the old note. 11. Key in BKPT (or any note you wish) and press !.

157

The program returns to the Side Shot screen with point 3 shown as the next number to be stored.

Figure 4-103 Taking a Shot on the Backpoint

You will now turn to the next point (to be stored as point 3).

Figure 4-104 Turning to the Next Point

The next point is an iron pin on the corner of the property; shoot this as a side shot. Put the rodman on point 3 and point the prism. 12. Press <SIDS> . For manual entry, key in the following information: Angle Right = 110.4355 Zenith Angle = 86.0755 Slope Distance = 38.82 The instrument takes the reading and prompt with: NOTE FOR POINT 3. 13. Press <Esc> to clear the last note on the display. 14. Now key in IPF (Iron Pin Found) and press !. The display shows the results in the Side Shot screen, with next number now set to point 4. Note that the description you entered now appears in the upper left corner of the display for this point. 158 SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-105 IPF Results

Now you will shoot a point on the fence line as a side shot (to be stored as point 4).

Figure 4-106 Shooting a Point on the Fence Line as a Side Shot

15. With the instrument still occupying point 1, put the rodman over point 4 (a point along the fence line). 16. Point the prism and press <SIDS> (Allegro J key, Titan K key). For manual entry, key in the following: Angle Right = 225.2305 Zenith Angle = 85.4510 Slope Distance = 57.69 The instrument takes the reading, after which the display prompts for a description: NOTE FOR POINT 4. 17. Press <Esc> to clear the display, then key in FENCE and press !. Note that the display shows you are still occupying point 1 with point 4 as the last point shot, and next number is now set to point 5 (195 00 00-1-4 NN 5).

159

Figure 4-107 Fence Results

You will now traverse, or move, the instrument to the next point (to be stored as point 5).

Figure 4-108 Traversing to the Next Point

18. Move the rodman to the next point (this will become point 5, the traverse point). Mark it with a hub and tack. Point the prism and press <TRAV> . For manual entry, key in the following: Angle Right = 248.2635 Zenith Angle = 90.2855 Slope Distance = 173.95 The instrument takes the reading, after which SMI prompts for a description: NOTE FOR POINT 5. 19. Press <Esc> to clear the display, then key in TP (for traverse point) and press !. The display returns to the Traverse screen, but notice that the display now shows that your occupying point is 5, with point 5 as the last point stored. The backsight point is 1 (where the instrument used to be), and the next number is point 6.

160

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-109 Traverse Screen

20. Move the instrument to point 5 and have the rodman move to point 1. 21. After the instrument is set up over point 5, sight the prism at point 1 and zero the instrument by pressing c <0> (the zero key).

Figure 4-110 Taking Another Side Shot Along the Fence

22. Take another side shot along the fence (to be stored as point 6). Shoot a point on the fence line as a side shot. 23. Put the rodman at this point. Sight the prism and press <SIDS> . Pressing <SIDS> returns you to the Side Shot menu. If the program was still in the Traverse menu and if you keyed in the information below, the occupy point and backsight point would change again. For manual entry, key in: Angle Right = 20.5835 Zenith Angle= 84.2735 Slope Distance = 52.46 The instrument takes the reading, after which SMI prompts for a description at point 6. 24. Press <Esc> to clear the display, then key in FENCE and press !. 161

The display shows the results in the Side Shot screen. Next number now defaults to point 7.

Figure 4-111 Side Shot Point on the Fence Line

Figure 4-112 Shooting an Iron Pin Marking the Corner of the Property
25. With the instrument still occupying point 5, move your rodman to the iron pin. Point the prism and press <SIDS> . For manual entry, key in: Angle Right = 150.3345 Zenith Angle = 88.4445 Slope Distance = 30.13 The instrument takes the reading, after which SMI prompts for a description. 26. Press <Esc> to clear the display, then key in IPF and press !. The display shows the data in the Side Shot screen.

162

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-113 Iron Pin Marking the Corner of the Property

The screen shows that you are still occupying point 5, with point 7 as the last point stored. The next number to be stored is point 8. Now you will do some checking. First, inverse between the first and second iron pins. The iron pins are found at point 3 and point 7. 27. To inverse between these points, simply key in 3 <SPACE> 7. 28. Press <PT-PT> . The display shows the inverse direction and distance from point 3 to point 7, including change in elevation and percent grade.

Figure 4-114 Inversing Between the First and Second Iron Pins
Since the H I and H ROD values are set to zero, the rod must be kept the same height as the instrument. Otherwise, the elevation values will not be correct. Another way to get correct elevations is to measure and key the H I and H ROD values into SMI. Next, you will check to find out how far off points 4 and 6 are from the fence line by performing a perpendicular offset. This exercise uses the Intersections function within SMI. 29. Press <> (Allegro R key, Titan S key, JETT U key). 30. Key in 3 and tap <PT 1>. 31. Key in 7 and tap <POL1> (point on line). 32. Since point 4 is the first point to be checked, key in 4 and tap <PT 2>.

163

33. Tap <PERPO> (perpendicular offset). The display shows the distance from point 3 to point 4 (81.6621) and shows that point 4 is 0.4849 feet to the left of the fence line, as viewed from point 3.

Figure 4-115 Distance from Point 3 to Point 4

Next, see how far off point 6 is from the fence line. 34. Key in 6 and tap <PERPO>. The display shows the distance from point 3 to point 6 (154.0130) and shows that point 6 is only 0.2000 feet to the left of the fence line.

Figure 4-116 Distance from Point 3 to Point 6

You will now traverse to the next point, a corner, also an iron pin.

Figure 4-117 Traversing to the Next Point

35. The instrument is still occupying point 5. Have your rodman move to the next point (an iron pin on the corner of the property), then point the prism and press <TRAV> . 164 SMI Version 8 User Guide

For manual entry, key in: Angle Right = 270.0320 Zenith Angle = 97.4030 Slope Distance = 69.74 The instrument takes the reading, after which the program prompts you to type a description for point 8. 36. Press <Esc> to clear the display, then key in TP AND IRON PIN and press !. The display returns to the Traverse screen.

Figure 4-118 Occupying Point 8

Note that you are now occupying point 8 (with 8 as the last point stored) and your backsight is set to point 5. 37. Now move your instrument to point 8. Next, you will traverse back to point 2.

Figure 4-119 Traversing Back to Point 2

38. Move the rodman back to point 2 (this is your beginning backsight point). Point the prism and press <TRAV> .

165

For manual entry, key in: Angle Right = 264.2545 Zenith Angle = 88.3305 Slope Distance = 210.24 The instrument takes the reading, after which the program prompts for a description. 39. Press <Esc> to clear the display, then key in TP OLD POINT 2 and press !. The program displays the data in the Traverse screen.

Figure 4-120 Occupying Point 9

Note that you are now occupying point 9, with point 9 as the last point stored. You are backsighted to point 8, and the next number is 10. You will now take a side shot to the last corner (point 10).

Figure 4-121 Taking the Side Shot to the Last Corner

40. Move the instrument to occupy point 9 (old point 2). 41. Backsight on point 8 and zero the gun. Next, move the rodman to the iron pin at the corner of the property. Point the prism and press <SIDS> .

166

SMI Version 8 User Guide

For manual entry, key in: Angle Right = 131.1325 Zenith Angle = 93.4255 Slope Distance = 40.78 The instrument takes the reading. The program prompts for a description: NOTE FOR POINT 10. 42. Press <Esc> to clear the display, then key in IP and press !. The display returns to the Side Shot screen. This shows that you are still occupying point 9, point 10 is the last point stored, and the next number is point 11.

Figure 4-122 Taking a Side Shot to the Last Corner

You will now take a final side shot to point 1 (to be stored as point 11).

Figure 4-123 Taking a Final Side Shot to Point 1

43. For angle closure, you will want this final shot to tie in all the corners. Move the rodman to point 1. Point the prism and press <SIDS> .

167

For manual entry, key in: Angle Right = 297.0440 Zenith Angle = 86.2055 Slope Distance = 96.24 The instrument takes the reading, after which the data collector prompts you to key in a description for point 11. 44. Press <Esc> to clear the display, then key in OLD POINT ONE and press !. The display show the data in the Side Shot screen.

Figure 4-124 Taking a Side Shot to Point 1

You are almost finished. With SMI, it is also easy to check your work. You can do that now using distance and angle closure. Check distance closure by inversing between point 9 and point 2. 45. Key in 9 <SPACE> 2 and press <PT-PT> (Allegro U key, Titan V key, JETT X key).

Figure 4-125 Checking the Distance Closure

Note that the distance between point 9 and point 2 is only 0.0356 feet. That is a good distance closure. Also note that the delta elevation is 0.2899 feet. This is because the rod height was not set to the same height of the instrument as surveyed. You can check angle closure by inversing between points 2 and 1, and then between points 9 and 11. 46. Key in 2 <SPACE> 1 and press <PT-PT> . 168 SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-126 The Inverse Between Points 2 and 1

47. Now key in 9 <SPACE> 11 and press <PT-PT> . The display shows the inverse between points 9 and 11.

Figure 4-127 The Inverse Between Points 9 and 11

As you can see, the azimuths computed by the two inverses differ by only 20 seconds. Good job! Now, you will compute bearings and distances around the perimeter. Start with point 3 and move clockwise. 48. Press <SETUP> . 49. Key in 3 and tap <OCPY>. 50. To traverse to point 7, press <ALPHA> (Allegro Ins key, Titan !. On the Jett, press c P. 51. Now type 7 and press !. This feature lets you traverse from the occupied point to another point in the current job. The display shows the bearing and distance from point 3 to point 7. key), type PTRVR, and press

169

Figure 4-128 Bearing and Distance from Point 3 to Point 7

52. Since you are already in the Point Traverse menu from the previous step, just key in 8 and tap <PTRA>. This saves you a keystroke. The display shows the bearing and distance from point 7 to point 8.

Figure 4-129 Bearing and Distance from Point 7 to Point 8

53. Next, key in 8 <SPACE> 10 and press <PT-PT> . The display shows the bearing and distance from point 8 to point 10.

Figure 4-130 Bearing and Distance from Point 8 to Point 10

54. Finally, key in 3 and tap <PTRA>.

170

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The display now shows the bearing and distance from point 10 to point 3.

Figure 4-131 Bearing and Distance from Point 10 to Point 3

! You can get the area now by tapping <AREA>. However, for this example it is preferred that you obtain areas using a Random Points file.

Figure 4-132 Calculating the Area

55. To get the area using this method, press <RPTS> . 56. Key in 3 <SPACE> 7 <SPACE> 8 <SPACE> 10 <SPACE> 3 ! and <AREA>.

Figure 4-133 Recommended Method for Calculating the Area

Determining areas using <RPTS> is recommended because you can see and check your points in the Random Points file before and after you compute the area.

Printout of Your Data

The data from the example was transferred to a PC using SMI Transfer program. Coordinates, elevations, and notes are printed by point number:

171

Point No.

Coordinates

Elevation

Notes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

5000.00000, 4907.22476, 5022.61900, 5028.43059, 5019.86276, 5032.86525, 5037.56610, 4951.19199, 4907.23551, 4871.69573, 5000.00509,

10000.00000 9975.14095 9968.55934 10050.01583 10172.80605 10122.23596 10197.17759 10180.63179 9975.10700 9955.28404 9999.97418

100.00000 94.24949 102.61879 104.27260 98.53746 103.60229 99.19695 89.22352 94.53936 91.89692 100.66866

YOUNG BKPT IPF FENCE TP FENCE IPF TP AND IRON PIN TP OLD POINT 2 IP OLD POINT ONE

Figure 4-134 Data Printout

View Function
You may also review each point using this function. The View menu lets you view points, area, back azimuth, and raw data. 1. Press <VIEW> (the C key, JETT V key) <PNTS> <NEXT>.

Figure 4-135 Reviewing Point 2

This shows point 2. 2. Tap <NEXT> to see additional points.

Raw Data
Here is the raw data as stored by SMI.
CM Definition: SS: Side Shots; TR: Traverse; OC: Occupied Coordinates; PC: Point Coordinates; CM: Comment; OS: Occupied Station; TS = time stamp; e = electronic; m = manual CM TS TUE 09/13/94 09:00:53A

172

SMI Version 8 User Guide

PC SS 0 SS 0 SS 0 TR 0 SS 1 SS 1 TR 1 TR 5 SS 8 SS 8

1 5000.00000 10000.00000 0.00000 YOUNG m HI:0 HR:0 BKPT 1 2 BAZ:195.00000 AR:0.00000 ZA:93.25350 SD:96.220 m HI:0 HR:0 IPF 1 3 BAZ:195.00000 AR:110.43550 ZA:86.07550 SD:38.820 m HI:0 HR:0 FENCE 1 4 BAZ:195.00000 AR:225.23050 ZA:85.45100 SD:57.690 m HI:0 HR:0 TP 1 5 BAZ:195.00000 AR:248.26350 ZA:90.28550 SD:173.950 m HI:0 HR:0 FENCE 5 6 BAZ:263.26350 AR:20.58350 ZA:84.27350 SD:52.460 m HI:0 HR:0 IPF 5 7 BAZ:263.26350 AR:150.33450 ZA:88.44350 SD:30.130 m HI:0 HR:0 TP AND IRON PIN 5 8 BAZ:263.26350 AR:270.03200 ZA:97.40300 SD:69.740 m HI:0 HR:0 TP OLD POINT 2 8 9 BAZ:353.29550 AR:264.25450 ZA:88.33050 SD:210.240 m HI:0 HR:0 IP 9 10 BAZ:77.55400 AR:131.13250 ZA:93.42550 SD:40.780 m HI:0 HR:0 OLD POINT ONE 9 11 BAZ:77.55400 AR:297.04400 ZA:86.20550 SD:96.240

Make a Backup Copy of Your Job

Before continuing with additional exercises, you should make a backup copy of your job for safekeeping. Backup copies are always a good idea. They are a way to protect your larger or more complex jobs, but they also give you a chance to experiment with computations without putting your original data at risk. To back up your job: 1. Press <JOB> (the A key, JETT I key) <COPY> and choose the job you wish to copy by highlighting it using the <> and <> keys. On the Jett, click <Blue> then S or O to move between jobs. ! Pressing <Blue> on the Jett twice will allow you to move between multiple jobs.

2. Press !. 3. Type in the destination name and press !. Once you copy the job, you are taken to the Setup menu of the new copied job. You may now make changes to this job without changing any data in your original job.

Adjusting Angles (Including Side Shots)

Earlier, you saw that the closing inverse from point 9 to point 11 differed by 20 seconds from the original inverse from point 2 to point 1.

173

Figure 4-136 Adjusting Angles

Here is how to make an angle adjustment that corrects the discrepancy in the plat. To do this, you will use the Random Points file. 1. Press <RPTS> (Allegro S key, Titan T key, JETT N key). The Random Points file will look like this: 2 1 -3 -4 5 -6 -7 8 9 -10 11 2 1 2. If a Random Points file is shown on the command line, press <Esc> to clear it. Then key in the following new Random Points file: 2 <SPACE> 1 <SPACE> 3 a <.> (the decimal key). This transforms the 3 into a negative value. (On the Jett, press : 2 <SPACE> 1 <SPACE> 3, then Y to make the number negative).

Figure 4-137 Random Points with Sideshots

# Entering a negative number in a Random Points file indicates that the point is a side shot.

3. Key in <SPACE> 4 a <.> 5 <SPACE> 6 a <.> <SPACE> 7 a <.> <SPACE> 8 <SPACE> 9 <SPACE> 10 a <.> <SPACE> 11 <SPACE> 2 <SPACE> 1 and press !.

174

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The display shows TEMP RANDOM POINTS. This means there is now a Random Points file in the memory. The last two traverse points you keyed into the Random Points file (2 and 1) are used to define the direction that is assumed to be correct for the angle adjustment; the two traverse points immediately before them (9 and 11) define the error direction. (Point 10 is a side shot. Side shots are not used to define direction.) 4. Press <NeXT> to scroll the Random Points menu screen, then tap <AA> (angle adjustment). The display shows CALCULATING as it adjusts the angles. It then stores the new data with your points, after which it signals with a beep; the display shows DONE when the calculation is finished. Now check to see how well you did, by inversing between points 9 and 11. 5. Key in 9 <SPACE> 11 and press <PT-PT> . The display shows the new direction of this line; it should match the direction of point 2 to point 1.

Figure 4-138 Inverse Point 9 to Point 11

The bearing is N15.0000E. If you do a 2 to 1 point inverse, you will notice the bearing is the same. The other information might be different, but that is okay you only changed the bearing or angle with this function. Angle adjustment modifies the direction in error (in this case, point 9 to 11) to match the direction or angle assumed to be correct (in this case, point 2 to 1) and adjusts all other angles in the plat accordingly. This allows angle adjustment using an open traverse to a set of good points.

Making a Compass Rule Adjustment

A compass rule adjustment also lets you modify the plat and it uses the Random Points file. This mainly affects the distances of your data. 1. Press <RPTS> . The Random Points screen shows the temporary Random Points file used in the above example. This example will use most of the same file. 175

2. Press <DEL> or <BkSp> to move the cursor back and erase the last three points: 11 2 1 (so the cursor is flashing after the space behind the -10). Now key in the number 2. The Random Points file should look like this:

2 1 -3 -4 5 -6 -7 8 9 -10 2
3. Press !. The display shows that the temporary file is now the current Random Points file. The last point (2) in the Random Points file is the accepted point. The traverse point immediately before it in the file is the point shot to the accepted point at the end of the traverse. In this case, that is point 9. (Point 10 is a side shot and is not used to define direction and distance of error.) 4. To make the compass rule adjustment, press <NeXT> <CR> (compass rule). The display shows CALCULATING as it adjusts the angles. It also briefly displays an angle error and adjustment. It then stores the new data with your points, after which it signals with a beep; the display shows DONE. You can again check the results by inversing between points 9 and 1.

Figure 4-139 Compass Rule Adjustment

In this case, the compass rule adjustment moved point 5 a certain direction for a specific distance. It then adjusted points 6 and 7 exactly the same amount. Points 8 and 9 also were adjusted, so that point 9 became exactly coincidental with point 2.

Computing Area
You can accurately compute the area within the boundary of any plat. Try it, using the working example and the Random Points file. 1. Press <RPTS> . 2. At the Random Points screen, press <Esc> to clear the existing points on the command line.

176

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Next, key in the points that define the boundary. 3. Key in 10 <SPACE> 3 <SPACE> 7 <SPACE> 8 <SPACE> 10 and press !. The display shows TEMP.R NOW CURRENT RPTS FILE. 4. From the Random Points menu, tap <AREA>. The program calculates the data point by point and then displays the area for the plat.

Figure 4-140 Plat Area

5. To view a graphic representation of the plat, tap <SPLOT> (Screen Plot) from the Random Points, then tap <SPLOT> again. The plat is drawn on the display, scaled to fit in the display.

Figure 4-141 Graphic Representation of Plat

6. Press <Esc> to return to the Screen Plot menu. Tap <LINE>. The message WILL DRAW LINES displays. 7. Tap <SPLOT> again. 8. Now press <Esc> to return to the Screen Plot menu, then tap <PT#> for point numbers. The message WON'T DRAW LABELS displays. 9. Tap <SPLOT> again.

177

Figure 4-142 SPLOT Lines Only

Rotating Coordinates
SMIs Rotate function is useful if you need to adjust your plat to bring it in line with a known direction, such as a deed bearing. For example, assume you need to rotate the plat so that the boundary line defined by points 10 and 8 fits an assumed deed bearing of S87 30E. Currently, the bearing of this line is N703349E. Follow the steps below to rotate the job to fit the known bearing. 1. Press <RPTS>. The display shows the Random Points menu. 2. If a Random Points file is shown on the command line, press <Esc> to clear it. Next, you will key in a new Random Points file to encompass all the points in the job. 3. Key in 1.11 and press ! ! Remember that the period is a shortcut to include all consecutive points between the first and last numbers. 4. At the Random Points menu, tap <CX> (coordinate transformation). The Transformation menu presents a series of soft key options to help you define the rotation that will take place.

Figure 4-143 Coordinate Transformation Menu Options

5. Tap <NEZ>.

178

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 4-144 Point Transformation Screen

First, you will define a reference starting point (or old point) and then a resulting point (or new point). 6. The old point is point 10, so key in 10 and tap <OLDPT>. The screen displays the current coordinates and elevation for point 10. However, in this case, point 10 also is the new point, since you are simply pivoting your plat on point 10 to match the deed bearing.

Figure 4-145 Current Coordinates and Elevation

7. Key in 10 and tap <NEWP>.

Figure 4-146 Point Recalled

The display shows POINT 10 RECALLED. 8. Tap <EXIT> then <ROT> (for rotate). 9. Enter the direction of the current line, as defined by points 10 to 8. Key in 10 <SPACE> 8 and tap <OLD~>. 179

Figure 4-147 Initial Rotation Angle

The display shows an initial rotation angle of 289 26 11; this is not yet an accurate figure, since the program requires a second direction to compute the proper rotation angle. Enter that second angle now. As indicated above, you know that the deed bearing for this line should be S8730E. 10. Key in 87.30. 11. Before pressing ! or any other key, that value needs to be changed to azimuth format. To change it, press c <SE> (the 2 key). The display shows the value as an azimuth of 92.3000; now you can enter it as the second direction. 12. Tap <NEW~>. The display now shows the correct rotation angle as 21 5611. The display also gives any change that will occur in north and east coordinates and elevation.

Figure 4-148 New Angle

13. To execute this rotation, tap <EXIT> <RUN>. The display shows that each point is being stored, and signals with a beep when the plat has been rotated; the display will read DONE. You can check the result by inversing between points 10 and 8. 14. Key in 10 <SPACE> 8 and press <PT-PT> .

180

SMI Version 8 User Guide

As you can see from the display, the line defined by point 10 to point 8 now shows the new bearing of S873000. You can also view the bearings and distances around the boundary by keying in the two points separated by spaces and then pressing <PT-PT> .

Figure 4-149 New Bearing

If you do a screen plot of the points that were just entered (10, 3, 7, and 8), the plat now looks like this:

Figure 4-150 New Plat

The old one looked like this:

Figure 4-151 Old Plat

Translating Coordinates
You can translate (as well as rotate) coordinates. Translation is useful when you want to change the actual coordinates of a point; the other points in the job will be adjusted accordingly. Heres how: Using the points from the example above, assume you want to change the coordinates of point 10. 1. Press <VIEW> (the C key, JETT V key), key in 10, and tap <PNTS>.

181

This shows its current coordinates of 4871.6835 N and 9955.3206 E (and elevation of 91.8969), and you would like to change them to 10000 N, 20000 E and an elevation of 850 feet. 2. Press <STO PT> (Allegro P key, Titan Q key, JETT K key). The Store Coordinate screen displays.

Figure 4-152 Store Coordinate Screen

You can see the current values for point 10 (you can also view these values by keying in 10 and tapping <RCLPT> from this menu). Now, enter the new coordinates for point 10. 3. Key in 10000 and tap <N>. Key in 20000 and tap <E>. Key in 850 and tap <EL>. 4. To store these new coordinates as point 12, key in 12 and tap <STORE>. ! Note that in Figure 4-152 on page 182, the next number is point 12. That means you could have simply pressed <STORE> to store the new coordinates at point 12, but it is always good practice to key in a point number first when you know you want to store a specific point. The screen now displays point 12 and its coordinates.

Figure 4-153 Point 12 Stored

You will now translate the plat. 5. Press <RPTS> for the Random Points file. 6. Press <Esc> to clear the command line. 7. Key in 1.11 and press !.

182

SMI Version 8 User Guide

8. Tap <CX> (transformation). The Transformation screen shows soft keys to help you define the translation you will be performing. ! The screen also shows initial transformation settings; however, these are not valid until you enter data to define the changes you are making. 9. Tap <NEZ>. 10. As in the earlier example, point 10 is the old reference point. Key in 10 and tap <OLDPT>. The display shows the existing coordinates for point 10. Now, however, you want to use point 12 as the new point. 11. Key in 12 and tap <NEWPT>. The display recalls point 12 and displays its coordinates. In this example, the rotation angle is 0, so you need to set the rotation angle.

Figure 4-154 Point 12 Recalled

12. Tap <EXIT>. 13. Tap <ROT>, key in 0, and tap <ROT~>. The display shows that the rotation angle has now been changed to 0. 14. To execute the translation, tap <EXIT> <RUN>. The display briefly shows that each point is being stored, and signals with a beep when the process is completed. 15. Press <VIEW>. The View menu displays. 16. Key in 10 and press !.

183

The display shows that point 10 now has the new coordinates and elevation. The remaining points in the job have also been transformed to match point 10.

Figure 4-155 Point 10

You can view each point by tapping <NEXT> or <PREV>. Or key in a specific point and tap <RCL> for Recall. For example, take a look at point 5. 17. Key in 5 and tap <RCL>. The display shows the new coordinates and elevation for point 5. As you can see, it also has been translated to match the new position relative to the new point 10.

Figure 4-156 Point 5

! Both of the previous examples (rotation and translation) could have been done in one operation. With a little practice, you will find that <CX> is a flexible and powerful tool.

Separate Distance and Angle

This function is designed to let you: Measure a distance to one point and the angle to another point. Measure an angle and distance to a point and move that point away from the point in relation to the instrument, toward the instrument, to the right of the point, or to the left of the point a specified distance. SMI Version 8 User Guide

184

Use a combination of the above options. Measure an angle and distance to a point and get an elevation of other points based on the horizontal crosshair position in the instrument. Store several points with various elevations or distances from this list using the first distance from <SDA> and last angle from <ZHA> (zenith and horizontal angle).

Figure 4-157 Separate Angle and Distance

One use of SDA is shown in the figure above. Point the prism beside a tree or a pole and tap <SDA> to get the distance, then point the center of the object and tap <ZHA> to get the angle. The distance and angle are used to compute a new point at the center of the object.

Figure 4-158 Using SDA to Find an Elevation on an Object

Another use of the Separate Distance and Angle function is illustrated above. Take a reading on a prism at the bottom of the pole using <SDA>. Turn to the top of the pole and tap <ZHA>. Whatever rod height is displayed is zeroed for the ZHA shot so that the elevation will be calculated to the horizontal crosshair, rather than be lowered by the rod height. Other points with elevations can be stored just by pointing and tapping <ZHA>.

185

Storing a Point Behind and to the Left of the Prism

With SMIs Separate Distance and Angle function, you can add or subtract a distance to the prism point. You can also move right or left from the prism point. The illustration below shows combining a distance back and a distance left.

Figure 4-159 Using SDA to Store a Point in a Stream

1. If the instrument has been chosen, point the prism and press <SETUP> <SDA>. The instrument takes a reading. 2. Key in 25 and tap <HD>. 3. Key in 30 and tap <HD>. 4. Without moving the instrument, tap <ZHA>. A point will be at the break in the stream, 25 feet back of the prism, and 30 feet to the left.

Figure 4-160 Store a Point

186

SMI Version 8 User Guide

As you can see when using SDA, a point can be stored toward or away from the instrument, or right or left of the instrument, or a combination of two of these.

Using ZHA to Store Multiple Points at an Offset or at a Distance Forward or Back

If you are only changing the prism point by distance not by horizontal or vertical angle you can store multiple points at varying distances without having the instrument reread the distance. Normally, the last thing you do in an SDA operation is tap <ZHA>. This takes the current angles from the instrument and uses them with the distance(s) entered previously. If the horizontal and vertical angles do not change from the SDA reading, press a and <ZHA>. This stores the point with the angles to the prism.

Example
1. If the instrument is turned on, flag i will be set. Press a 5 to turn off the instrument. 2. Press <SETUP> (Allegro F key, Titan G key, JETT J key) and <SDA>. 3. Key in 100 <SPACE> 89 <SPACE> 30 and press !.

Figure 4-161 First Step of SDA Function

4. Key in 5 and tap <HD>.

Figure 4-162 Five Feet to the Right

187

5. Press a <ZHA>.

Figure 4-163 Stores a Point without Requiring Another Shot

Note that the distance was updated to account for the distance from the instrument to the point, 5 feet right of the prism. Other distances can be entered and stored using a <ZHA>. 6. Key in 0 and tap <HD>. 7. Key in 10 and tap <HD>.

Figure 4-164 Changes in the Horizontal Distance

8. Press a <ZHA>. When <ZHA> is pressed, the point is stored and the distance is updated to show the total distance. 9. To take a normal side shot after storing one or more separate distance and angle points, just press <SIDS> . 10. Whenever you are storing points and wish to know the direction, distance, or difference in elevation or grade between the points, key in the point numbers separated by a <SPACE> and press <PT-PT> . All functions discussed in this chapter are available if you have Data Collection or Construction. If an instrument driver is selected, the horizontal angle, zenith angle, and slope distance are automatically collected from the instrument and used in the SMI software.

188

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Azimuth Surveying
There are a few azimuth surveyors around. Certainly, azimuth surveying has some definite advantages. For one thing, you always know the direction. When you close the traverse loop, you immediately know your angle closure error. A few years ago when a lot of computations were not so easy, the field reduction process was much simpler. You can survey in azimuths with the SMI surveying software, if you wish. Simply go to the Change menu, press <CHG> , tap <MODE> <ZERo>. This soft key is a toggle between angle right surveying (zero backsight), directional theodolite surveying, and azimuth surveying. When you are set to azimuth surveying, if you are occupying a point and you have chosen your instrument (and your instrument allows two-way communication), SMI sends the back azimuth to the instrument when you key in the back azimuth, back bearing, or back point. You may then turn to a point and press <SIDS> or <TRAV> and store the point. You may have noticed that most examples in this guide deal with zeroing on the backsight and turning angle right. Even though you may be accustomed to running azimuths, you may want to consider switching to angle right. Heres why: ! SMI does not require that you switch from azimuths to angle right. However, these are some reasons to consider it. With SMI, you can have your display set to azimuth so that you can keep up with your direction. Generally, it is much easier to zero the instrument on the backsight, rather than set the back azimuth on the instrument. With SMI, when you finish your boundary loop, you can easily check your angle closure and distance closure. With SMI, your computations are automatic, so working in angle right does not increase computation time for field book reduction. If you wish to turn multiple angles, it is much more feasible when turning angle right. If you like the idea of turning directly to a line azimuth when using azimuths, that is a nice plus; but, with SMI, you can use Stake to get the correct angle right to turn and distance to go.

189

CONSTRUCTION
In this chapter: SMI Software Features and Examples ..............................192 Staking...............................................................................209 Entering Vertical Control....................................................213 Draw Vertical Control.........................................................217 Entering Templates............................................................218 Draw the Template ............................................................221 Templates Uncommon ...................................................222 Copy Templates to Other Side ..........................................230 Slope Staking.....................................................................231 Cutsheet Files....................................................................237 Spirals................................................................................238

CHAPTER

191

SMIs Construction includes all the powerful features of Data Collection plus hundreds of routines for working with tangents, simple curves, spiral curves, horizontal alignments, vertical control, and typical sections. Templates let you handle sophisticated functions, including (but not limited to) superelevations, changes in road width and flat bottom ditches. Use Construction to work with station and offsets from anywhere on the job. Construction also quickly handles setting grade stake, slope stakes, bluetops, staking centerlines, side lines, and boundary points.

SMI Software Features and Examples

Figure 5-1 SMI Software Features Example

In the figure above, there is a simple curve from 2 to 4. For now, the above sketch will be used to illustrate several features of the SMI surveying software to store the boundary points.

Creating a Job
1. Turn off all flags: raw data (a <2> ), elevations (a <3> ), notes (a <4> ), and instrument (a <5> ). 2. Press <JOB> <NEW> <NEW>, key in HARVICK, and press !.

Figure 5-2 Creating a Job Called HARVICK

192

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Traversing the Boundary from Point 1 to Point 7

1. Press <TRAV> , key in 70, tap <BRG>, key in 3 (quadrant number), and press !. 2. Key in 200 and tap <HDIST>. Point 2 is stored.

Figure 5-3 Storing Point 2

3. Press <CURVE> (Allegro Q key, Titan R key, JETT a U key). 4. Key in 45 and tap <>. 5. Key in 100 and tap <T> (tangent).

Figure 5-4 Entering the Delta and Tangent for the Curve
6. Tap <RIGHT <STORE>.

Figure 5-5 Storing the Horizontal Curves

7. Press <TRAV> .

193

Figure 5-6 Bearing and Distance

8. Tap <AZ>. You will see 295 (the forward tangent). This is the azimuth of the above bearing.

Figure 5-7 Azimuth of Bearing

9. Press !. 10. Key in 250 and tap <HDIST>. Point 5 is stored.

Figure 5-8 Storing Point 5

11. Key in 410 (quadrant 4 and a 10-degree bearing) and tap <BRG>.

194

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 5-9 Entering the Bearing for Point 6

12. Key in 400 and tap <HDIST>. Point 6 is stored.

Figure 5-10 Storing Point 6

13. Key in 286.30 and tap <BRG> (quadrant 2 and the bearing).

Figure 5-11 Entering the Bearing for Point 7

14. Key in 600 and tap <HDIST>. Point 7 is stored.

Figure 5-12 Storing Point 7

195

Now you will find the bearing and distance from 7 back to point 1. 15. Key in 7 <SPACE> 1 and press <PT-PT> .

Figure 5-13 Finding the Bearing and Distance from Point 7 to Point 1
As you can see, the bearing is S 9 49 16 E and the distance is 408.59.

Traverse to Point 1 Using the Inversed Distance

1. Press <TRAV> . 2. Key in 209.4916 and tap <BRG>.

Figure 5-14 Entering the Bearing

3. Key in 408.59 and tap <HDIST>.

Figure 5-15 Traversing to Point 1

Now, check the distance error from 8 to 1.

196

SMI Version 8 User Guide

4. Key in 8 <SPACE> 1 and press <PT-PT> .

Figure 5-16 Checking the Distance Error Between Points 8 and 1

Find the Area, Perimeter, Square Feet, and Precision

1. Press <RPTS> . 2. Key in 1 <SPACE> " 2 <SPACE> 3 <SPACE> 4" <SPACE> 5.8 (this means to use all points from 5 through 8) <SPACE> 1. The entry should look like this:

1 2 3 4 5.8 1
3. Press !. 4. Tap <PREC>.

Figure 5-17 Displaying the Precision

This shows a super high precision. It is much higher than you can hope for in the field. 5. Tap <AREA>. 6. The display shows the following.

197

Figure 5-18 Area Precision

Point 8 is very close to point 1. Above you see that the difference is 0.0022 feet. Therefore, the square feet and precision will be more accurate if you take out point 8 and just leave 1. As stated earlier, you will not be able to get a precision that high in the field. Here is a more accurate way of getting area: 7. Edit the above Random Points file by pressing <RPTS> . You will see 1 2 3 4 5.000008 1 (The program puts the zeroes in the file automatically to separate the two numbers. This allows point numbers of up to 999,999.) 8. Change the 8 to a 7 and delete the last 1 by using the backspace ( <BkSp> ) key. By removing point 8, you will get more accurate numbers for the lot. 9. Another way to edit this file is to press <Esc> and re-enter the data as shown below. Either way is OK: 1 2 3 4 5.000007 or 1 2 3 4 5.7. 10. Press ! <AREA>.

Figure 5-19 Displaying the Area

It is amazing how 0.0022 feet makes that much of a difference in the square footage.

198

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Designing a Spiral with 5 as the Main PI

In this example, you will design the spiral such that the spiral length back will be 100, spiral length ahead will be 100, and radius of the simple curve will be 150. First store two points at estimated TS (Tangent to Spiral) and ST (Spiral to Tangent) points. 1. Press <SETUP> . 2. Key in 5, tap <OCPY>, key in 8 and press <BKPT>.

Figure 5-20 Storing Points 5 and 8

3. Press <SIDS> . 4. Key in 5 <SPACE> 4 and tap <AZ>.

Figure 5-21 Azimuth from Point 5 to Point 4

5. Key in 150 (estimated distance to the TS point) and tap <HDIST>.Point 9 is stored.

Figure 5-22 Storing Point 9

199

6. Key in 5 <SPACE> 6 and tap <AZ>.

Figure 5-23 Azimuth from Point 5 to Point 6

7. Key in 150 and tap <HDIST>. Point 10 is stored.

Figure 5-24 Storing Point 10

Let SMI create a spiral according to the design and compute the mathematically correct positions of points 9 and 10. See Spirals in Construction on page 238 for additional information. First, enter the desired spiral data into the horizontal control.

Entering Horizontal Control

1. Press <CONST> (Allegro I key, Titan J key, JETT Q key), <NeXT> <HCCL> and key in the horizontal control data. 2. Enter the entire boundary from point 1 to point 8 and insert the spiral into the horizontal control.

200

SMI Version 8 User Guide

1 <SPACE> 0 <SPACE> (0+00 is the station at point 1) "(double quotes are needed for entering a simple curve) 2 <SPACE> 3 <SPACE> 4" <SPACE> <BLUEKEY> <N> . This adds {} to the display. 9 (the estimated tangent to spiral point) <SPACE> 5 (the main PI) <SPACE> 10 (the spiral to tangent point) <SPACE> 150 (the radius of the simple curve between the spirals) <SPACE> 100 (spiral length back and ahead is the same so we only enter once) <> (cursor right) <SPACE> 6 <SPACE> 7 <SPACE> 8
The entry should look like this: 1 0 2 3 4 {9 5 10 150 100} 6 7 8 3. If your entry resembles the entry above, press !. Points 9 and 10 prompt whether to override. 4. Press ! in each case.

Figure 5-25 Override Points

! If you do not wish to override the original points, key in a desired point number before pressing !. If you use this approach, you must edit the HCCL file to replace 9 and 10 with the new point numbers.

Check the New Tangent Lengths from Points 9 and 10

1. Key in 5 <SPACE> 9 and press <PT-PT> . The distance is 129.3408. 2. Key in 5 <SPACE> 10 and press <PT-PT> . The distance is 129.3408.

201

Find the Station of Points 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8

Figure 5-26 Find Station of Points Example

A station is a location along a defined centerline. Stations measure distance along a horizontal centerline. Each station is usually 100 feet long if measuring in feet or 1000 meters long when measuring in meters. When indicating a particular distance along the centerline, the station is followed by a plus and the remaining distance to get to the correct position. For example, station 2+55.5 is 255.5 feet down the centerline from station 0+00. Station 10+000.00 would be 10 km from station 0+000. When entering a station into the data collector, just omit the plus symbol and key in the distance. So, to key in station 2+55.5, simply type 255.5. Offsets from the centerline are entered as positive (right) or negative (left) values. 1. Press <CONST> . 2. Key in 2 and press a <FS>. The functions in the Construction menu assume stations instead of point numbers. If you want to work with point numbers, you must key in a before tapping <FS> (foresight point).

Figure 5-27 Station and Offset at Point 2

202

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Based on what the display shows, the station is 2+00 and the offset is 0. The instrument is occupying point 5 and backsighting point 8. Based on this occupied point and backsight point, the given angle to turn and the distance to go are listed in the lower left-hand corner of the display. 3. Key in 4 and press a <FS>.

Figure 5-28 Station and Offset at Point 4

Before continuing, suppose you have to change your occupied and backsight points. 4. Tap <Setup> 7 <OCPY> 6 <BKPT>. 5. Press <CONST> . This returns you to the Construction menu. 6. Key in 5 and press a <FS>.

Figure 5-29 Station and Offset at Point 5

SMI gives a station and offset for point 5 of 6+32.27 and left offset of 22.23. You can determine the coordinates for that station and offset and compare them to the coordinates for point 5. 7. Press <NeXT> <NeXT> , key in 632.27 <SPACE> 22.23 a <+/-> (Allegro decimal key, Titan <BLUEKEY> <ESC> ) <STSTO> (for station store). The displays shows Point 11 Stored. 8. Key in 5 <SPACE> 11 and press <PT-PT> .

203

Figure 5-30 Inverse Point 5 to Point 11

This does not positively prove the correctness of the work; however, it is good circumstantial evidence. Perform one more test: 9. Press <CONST> , key in 632.27 <SPACE> 22.23 and press a <+/-> . When you are done, it should look like this: 632.27 -22.23. 10. Tap <FS>. ! When a station and offset are used, tap <FS>, but when a point number is used, press a <FS>.

Figure 5-31 Staking Points

Now compare the angle and distance when you use a point and when you use a station and offset that were computed. It is not perfect, but it is close. This is additional circumstantial evidence to prove the accuracy. You can still do one more thing. 11. Press <STAKE> . 12. Key in point 5 and tap <FSPT>.

204

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 5-32 Key in 5

13. Press <CONST> , key in 6, and press a <FS>.

Figure 5-33 Key in 6

All these examples show that we can accept the station number as being OK. You know the offset should be 0+00. Look at the angle and distance. This makes sense, since the instrument is backsighting on the same point, and the distance is 600. 14. Key in 7 and press a <FS>. The distance should be zero; the offset should be 0+00. The station number is exactly 600 feet more.

Figure 5-34 Key in 7

Check the last point. 15. Key in 8 and press a <FS>.

205

The distance and offset are correct. The angle right looks OK, but perform the next step to check it.

Figure 5-35 Key in 8

16. Press <MORE> (Allegro T key, Titan U key, JETT O key) <CAR> (Compute Angle Right), key in 7 <SPACE> 6, and tap <BKAZ>. Press 7 <SPACE> 8 and tap <FSAZ>. The angle right checks: 256 40 44.

Figure 5-36 Checking the Angle Right

Regarding the station number, recall that previously the perimeter of this project was discussed. That perimeter should be a little more than this perimeter because of the spiral insert at 5. Below is a copy of what was done:

Figure 5-37 Copy of Example

Everything checks out OK for the free station resection point. You are now ready to take shots anywhere and get station and offset positions on the boundary. You can also give any station and any offset and get an angle to turn and a distance to go. Take a sample shot to get a clock direction to head or get the Go or Come and Right or Left distances to the point.

206

SMI Version 8 User Guide

As you have perhaps observed, this example is a control file with a closed loop. Go to the field using the information from the example just shown. The area is open, except for one large oak tree, and you will level your instrument over a place that is convenient to work from and in view of at least two control points. Free station to the shaded area by following the steps below. 1. Press <SETUP> <NeXT> <2PFS> <NeXT> You can now enter the two control points to be used for the free station position. 2. Key in 5 and tap <PTA>. 3. Key in 7 and tap <PTB>. From now on, SMI will remember these points as A (the northwesterly point) and B (the southerly point). 4. Level the instrument. Position the prism at point 5 or A (zeroing on A is optional it seems impossible, but SMIs Free Station Resection program works if you do not zero on anything). 5. Choose your instrument by pressing <SETUP> <NeXT> <NeXT> <INST> and choosing (Your brand), (Your type). 6. Since you might be in the office right now, if flag i is displayed at the top of the display, press a <5> to exit the Instrument mode. a <5> is a toggle that turns Instrument mode on or off. If flag i is off, the instrument will be off and when you press a key that normally causes the instrument to measure, you will be prompted to enter the slope distance, zenith angle, and angle right. The instrument takes a reading and displays the information. 7. Tap <ADIR>, key in 175.39 (Slope Distance), <SPACE> 87.56 (Zenith Angle), <SPACE> 0 (the circle reading,), and press !. 8. Position the prism over point 7, then turn the instrument to point 7 or B and tap <BDIR>. 9. Here is what you should use in an indoor setting (by now you know to put a space between each entry): 463.46 <SPACE> 89.30 <SPACE> 181.2130 !. 10. Tap <RSLTS>.

207

Figure 5-38 Displaying the Results The precision shows 1 foot in 26446. If you get this in the field, that is great. Tapping <STORE> is optional. However, for our example, tap <STORE> so our point number will agree. If you do not tap <STORE> here, the occupied point will read FREE, meaning the instrument is on a free station point. Check your work. 11. Press <STAKE> (Allegro O key, Titan P key, JETT S key). 12. Key in 2 and tap <FSPT>. 13. Position the prism over point number 2, point the instrument at point 2, and tap <SHOT>. The reading from the instrument is: Circle Reading 253 41 Zenith Angle 86.50 Slope Distance 343.30 14. Key in 343.30 <SPACE> 86.50 <SPACE> 253.41 and press !. This is a fairly good check.

Figure 5-39 Staking 2

208

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Staking
These readings require manual input for simplicity.

Stake a Point at Station 6+00

This point happens to be in the spiral, but it does not matter. SMI finds the station wherever it is. 1. Press <CONST> . 2. Key in 600 and tap <FS>.

Figure 5-40 Key in 600

If you pressed <STORE>, your screen reads the occupied point as 12 (the figure above on the left); if you did not store the free station point, the occupied point is FREE (the figure above on the right). For the rest of the example, the occupied point will be 12. 3. Tap <STKS> (stake shot). 4. Key in 150 <SPACE> 80 <SPACE> 348 and press !.

Figure 5-41 Shot Values

5. Have the rodman move accordingly. 6. Tap <SHOT>.

209

7. Key in 153.75 <SPACE> 80 <SPACE> 348.14 and press !. This point happens to be in the spiral. It does not matter. SMI finds the station wherever it is.

Figure 5-42 Drive the Stake

8. Drive the stake.

Staking Right of Way

The right of way marker is to be at station 8+50 at an offset of 50 feet. Stake this point from the current free station position. 1. Press <CONST> . 2. Key in 850 <SPACE> 50 and tap <FS>.

Figure 5-43 Enter Station and Offset

3. Tap <STKS>, key in 186.20 <SPACE> 89.40 <SPACE> 79.12, and press !.

210

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 5-44 Come, Left, and Dist Values

4. Have the rodman move a half inch toward the instrument and a half inch to the rodmans left, or have him move .06 feet toward 11 oclock. 5. Drive the stake and tap <SHOT> to check.

Staking the Centerline

Stake the centerline on 50-foot intervals beginning with station 0+00. SMI defaults on 100-foot increments. 1. To change the increment, press <CONST> <NeXT> <NeXT> <OPT>.

Figure 5-45 SMI Default

2. Key in 50 and tap <STAI> (station interval).

Figure 5-46 Station Interval

3. Press <CONST> .

211

4. Key in 0 and tap <FS>.

Figure 5-47 CVE Chain C1

You are now ready to point at the prism. 5. Tap <STKS> and stake the point. 6. Key in 478.3753 <SPACE> 90.2430 <SPACE> 231.4511 and press !.

Figure 5-48 Come, Left, and Distance Values

7. To increment to the next station to stake, tap <FS> without keying in a value.

Figure 5-49 Stake the Next Station

8. Stake this and tap <FS> to increment to the next point, etc.

212

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Staking a Point on an Offset and Incrementing

1. Press <CONST> . 2. Key in 100 (station number) <SPACE> 50 (offset distance) and tap <FS>.

Figure 5-50 Station and Offset

3. Stake the point and tap <FS>.

Figure 5-51 Staking the Point

! The offset remains constant as you tap <FS> to increment to the next station. You are now ready to learn how to work with vertical control and templates.

Entering Vertical Control

There are several types of vertical control. Following are some examples. The vertical control example below includes slopes, a vertical curve, and break point. You will learn how to enter this vertical control into SMIs Construction. 1. Press <CONST> <NeXT> <VCCL>. 2. The following information should be keyed in for this vertical control example: STA, elevation, percent, quotes, pvc station, pvt station, close quote, percent, station, and percent. See the figure below. 213

Figure 5-52 Vertical Control

The data, when entered in the data collector, should look like this:

0 100 4 400 900 -3 1500 2.54

The keystrokes to key in the data are: (0 is already displayed and a <SPACE> is already there) 100 <SPACE> 4 <SPACE> "400 <SPACE> 900" <SPACE> 3 a <+/-> <SPACE> 1500 <SPACE> 2.54. 3. Press !. This enters the vertical control for the HARVICK job with which you have been working.

Figure 5-53 Enter the Vertical Control

You will now find the designed elevation for stations 0+00, 1+00, 9+00, and 15+00. Continuing to use the example from above, the occupied point is still a free station point. You do not have to use a free station point when using a vertical control any known point will do. 4. Press a <3> . This is the shortcut to turning on Elevations. 5. Press <CONST> , key in 0, and tap <FS>.

214

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The elevation is 100, as it should be because you are at the beginning station and your vertical control start elevation is 100.

Figure 5-54 Find the Designated Elevation

6. Key in 100 and tap <FS>. The elevation at station 1+00 is 104. At a 4% slope, that could have been predicted.

Figure 5-55 Elevation at Station 1+00

7. Key in 400 and tap <FS>.

Figure 5-56 Elevation at Station 4+00

8. Key in 900 and tap <FS>.

215

Figure 5-57 Elevation at Station 9+00

9. Key in 1500 and tap <FS>.

Figure 5-58 Elevation at Station 15+00

10. Tap <FS>. The software automatically increments 50 feet. Recall that previously, the increment was set from 100 to 50 feet.

Figure 5-59 Elevation at Station 15+50

Try giving SMI a station and an offset. 11. Key in 400 <SPACE> 50 and tap <FS>.

216

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 5-60 Elevation at Station 4+00.00 +50.00

! Note that the elevation is the same as station 4+00 at the centerline. This indicates there is a default flat cross-section template in this job. Go to the Template menu to see what it looks like.

Draw Vertical Control

SMI can show you a drawing of the vertical control in your job. 1. Press <CONST> <NeXT> <NeXT> . 2. Tap <DRAW> <VCCL> (vertical control).

Figure 5-61 Draw Vertical Control

The number on the bottom of the screen is the low point of the control. The number on the top is the high point of the control. The numbers on the left and right sides are the beginning and ending stations. Please note that the vertical control is exaggerated. If it was not, the drawing would look like a flat line in most cases.

217

Entering Templates
1. Press <NeXT> <TMPL>.

Figure 5-62 Default Template

Do not let this message fool you. There is a default template hidden in there, but it is flat. Once you go to <TMPL> and tap <EDIT>, the default template disappears and you need to enter your own template. 2. Tap <EDIT>. Note that the station defaulted on 0+00. You are now ready to enter segment 1.

Figure 5-63 Right Template

Figure 5-64 Station Template

If this is what the road work is calling for, the next figure is what the template looks like.

218

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 5-65 Station 0+00 Template

3. Tap <SEG1>. This is what the data should look like: -2 12 4. Key in 2 (for the -2% downward slope) and press a <+/-> <SPACE> 12 (for the number of feet that the -2% grade travels) ! (to change the sign on the JETT press the Y key).

Figure 5-66 Segment 1

5. Tap <SEG2>, key in 6 (for the -6% downward slope) a <+/-> <SPACE> 8 ! (for the number of feet that the -6% grade travels).

Figure 5-67 Segment 2

6. Tap <DITCH> <Esc> to remove the default ditch. 7. Key in 2 <SPACE> (for the 2:1 ditch slope) 10 <SPACE> (for the number of feet the 2:1 ditch travels) 3 (for the 3:1 back slope) and press !.

219

Figure 5-68 Ditch Slope and Back Slope

That finishes the template at station 0+00. Now, enter the next template on the right side of the centerline 200 feet down the road.

Figure 5-69 Station 2+00 Template

First, go to station 2+00. 8. Key in 200 and tap <STA>.

Figure 5-70 Station 2+00

To go to a segment not displayed, first key in the segment number that you wish to edit and tap <SEG1> or it may be <SEG2> or <SEG3>. Since <SEG1> is displayed here, it is not necessary to tap the segment number first. 9. Key in 1 and tap <SEG1>. 10. Use the arrow and backspace keys to change the -2 to a -4. The entry should be -4 12. When it is, press !. 220 SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 5-71 Segment 1

11. Tap <DITCH>. You see 2 10 3. 12. Use the <> (cursor right) key to move the cursor to the 3 and change it to a 4. Press !.

Figure 5-72 Back Slope 4 to 1

Draw the Template

1. Press <CONST> <NeXT> <NeXT> . 2. Tap <DRAW> <TMPL> (for vertical control). The program prompts you for the station you would like drawn; 0 is the default. 3. For this example, just press ! to accept 0 as the station. You are now prompted for the left or right side of the centerline. 4. Tap <RIGHT> for now.

221

Figure 5-73 Template Drawing

The number on the left is the offset from the centerline (it will always be zero). The top number is the change in the elevation from the centerline to the top of the scene. The bottom number is the change in elevation from the centerline to the bottom of the scene. The right side number is the offset to the right of the scene.

Templates Uncommon
Templates with Curbs

Figure 5-74 Cut Template with a Curb

This example demonstrates how to handle a vertical distance such as a curb. This situation is handled by entering a very steep slope for a very short distance. The figure above shows a 0.5 curb. Straight up is an infinite slope. To solve this mathematical problem, the curb can be entered as being 0.005 long with a slope of 10000% (10000%/100 * 0.005 = 0.5 of vertical change). Therefore, whatever

222

SMI Version 8 User Guide

the vertical change is, you can enter a slope of 10000 and move the vertical distance decimal two places to the left. 1. Press <CONST> <NeXT> <TMPL> to get in the Template Viewer. 2. Tap <NEXT> until the current template is at station 2+00. 3. Tap <EDIT> to get in the Template Editor. 4. Type 300 and tap <STA> to start editing the template at station 3+00. This new template is a copy of the previous template. You will change it to match the template shown in the figure above. 5. Type 1 and tap <SEG1> to edit the first segment. 6. Press <Esc> to clear the previous slope and distance, and type 2 a <+/-> <SPACE> 12 and press ! (you do not need to press the a key with the JETT). 7. Tap <SEG2>, press <Esc> to clear the previous entry, type 10000 <SPACE> .005, and press !. 8. Tap <SEG3>, type 4 <SPACE> 6, and press !. 9. Continue entering this template in the next section.

Cut Templates without a Fill Slope

Figure 5-75 Cut Templates without a Fill Slope Template

The template in Figure 5-74 on page 222 also demonstrates how to enter the ditch information when there is no ditch slope (fill slope). The software requires that the ditch slope (fill slope), ditch distance, and back slope (cut slope) always have a nonzero value. If you make the ditch distance value close to zero, both the cut and fill slopes will start from the shoulder. Since you can assume that all shots will be taken above the shoulder, only the cut slope will be used. This step is continued from the previous section.

223

10. Tap <DITCH>, press <Esc> to clear the previous entry, type 1 <SPACE> .01 <SPACE> 3, and press !. ! If a shot is taken below the ditch on this template, the data collector catches on the 1:1 ditch slope.

Fill Templates without a Back Slope

Figure 5-76 Fill Templates without a Back Slope Example

This example demonstrates how to enter a template that does not have a back slope. The software requires that the ditch slope (fill slope), ditch distance, and back slope (cut slope) always have a nonzero value. If you make the ditch distance value close to zero, both the cut and fill slopes will start from the shoulder. Since you can assume that all shots will be taken below the shoulder, only the fill slope will be used. 1. Press <CONST> <NeXT> <TMPL> to get in the Template viewer. 2. Tap <NEXT> until the current template is at station 3+00. 3. Tap <EDIT> to start the Template Editor. 4. Type 400 and tap <STA> to start editing the template at station 4+00. This new template is a copy of the template at station 3+00. You will change it to match the template shown in Figure 5-76 on page 224. 5. Type 1 and tap <SEG1> to edit the first segment. 6. Press <Esc> to clear the previous slope and distance, and type 2 a <+/-> <SPACE> 12 and press ! (you do not need to press the a key with the JETT). 7. Tap <SEG2>, press <Esc> to clear the previous entry, type 8 a <+/-> <SPACE> 6, and press ! (you do not need to press the a key with the JETT). 8. Tap <DEL>, type 3, and press ! to delete segment 3.

224

SMI Version 8 User Guide

9. Tap <DITCH>. 10. Press <Esc> to clear the previous entry, and type 1 <SPACE> .01 <SPACE> 1 and press !. The back slope must be entered as a placeholder, even though it does not exist.

Figure 5-77 Fill Templates without a Back Slope

Template with Ditch Bottom Example

If the template needs to represent a cut ditch with a flat bottom, use the following example:

100 -2 20 -5 10 1 4 2 1.5
Whereby the 2 in the sequence represents the horizontal distance or width of the ditch bottom measured from the base of the cut ditch slope or fore slope.

Figure 5-78 Template with Ditch Bottom Example

The presence of a ditch bottom is assumed when there is an odd number of elements in the template.

Widening Example
Widening may be performed along the first segment or element of your template. Typically, this section is widened, as it represents the travel way pavement or subgrade section of a standard two-lane road. To perform a widening, you need to enter four stations with templates. Place a template at the beginning of 225

the widening (B), start of full widening (C), end of full widening (D), and end of widening (E). Refer to the diagram below for referenced stations.

Figure 5-79 Standard Widening Transition Example

Above is an example of a standard widening transition. You will use two different templates for the left side only. The diagram is illustrated as follows:

Standard Widening Transition Example Explanation

Left Template Normal width left <none required> Normal width left Full widening left Full widening left Normal width left <none required> Right Template Normal width right <none required> <none required> <none required> <none required> <none required> <none required> Station Beg A B C D E F

226

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The templates illustrated may have been entered as follows:

Standard Widening Transition Templates

Left Template 0 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 <none required> 1300 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 1600 -2 20 -8 4 3 4 3 2000 -2 20 -8 4 3 4 3 2300 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 <none required> Right Template 0 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 <none required> <none required> <none required> <none required> <none required> <none required> Station Beg A B C D E F

Superelevation Example
To perform superelevation, you also need to transition between a series of templates. These templates need to be placed at the beginning and ending of the transitions. If you have a horizontal curve turning to the right (clockwise), a standard method is to begin rotating the left side up until the cross slope of the pavement or subgrade matches that of the right side. Then, both sides rotate uniformly until the station where the Maximum SuperElevation (MSE) is reached. Place another set of templates at the station the MSE is ending to start the transition back down. Place yet another one at the point at the end of the superelevation to mark the end of the superelevation transition. The slope transition works on the first segment from the start of the template only.

Figure 5-80 Standard Superelevation Transition Example

227

Figure 5-80 above is an example of a standard superelevation transition. You use two different templates for the left side and two different templates for the right side. The diagram is illustrated as follows:

Standard Superelevation Transition Example Explanation

Left Template Normal crown left <none required> Maximum super left Maximum super left <none required> Normal crown left Right Template <none required> Normal crown right Maximum super right Maximum super right Normal crown right <none required> Station A B C D E F

The templates illustrated may have been entered as follows:

Standard Superelevation Transition Templates

Left Template 0 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 1000 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 <none required> 1600 6 12 -8 4 3 4 3 2000 6 12 -8 4 3 4 3 <none required> 2600 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 Right Template 0 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 <none required> 1300 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 1600 -6 12 -8 4 3 4 3 2000 -6 12 -8 4 3 4 3 2300 -2 12 -8 4 3 4 3 <none required> Station Beg A B C D E F

228

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Interpolation Between Templates

When a shot is taken, or a foresight is entered for a station that is between two templates, the slopes and distances from each segment are interpolated to create a new template exactly at that station. When the two templates being interpolated between have different numbers of segments, the data collector displays the error message Templates Not Similar. To prevent this from happening, a template with the same number of segments should be placed right next to the template that has a different number of templates. The template at station 3+00 in the HARVICK example used in this chapter has three segments while the other templates at 0+00, 2+00, and 4+00 have two segments. You can correct this problem by creating a copy of the template at station 2+00 at station 2+99.99 and putting a copy of the template at station 3+00 at station 3+99.99. 1. Press <CONST> <NeXT> <TMPL> to get in the Template viewer. 2. Tap <EDIT> to start the Template editor. 3. Type 200 and tap <STA> to recall the template at station 2+00. If you enter the station number of a template and then tap <STA>, the template at that station is recalled. 4. Type 299.99 and tap <STA> to store the current template at station 2+99.99. This new template is a copy of the template at station 2+00. When <STA> is pressed after entering a station number for a template that does not yet exist, the information from the template at the station previous to the station entered is used to create the new station. 5. Tap <STA> to recall the template at station 3+00. When there is nothing on the stack, <STA> recalls the next template. 6. Type 399.99 and tap <STA> to store the current template at station 3+99.99. This new template is a copy of the template at station 2+00. If you enter the station number of a template that has not been stored and then tap <STA>, the current station is stored.

229

Figure 5-81 Interpolation Between Templates Example

Copy Templates to Other Side

Duplicate the right template on the left side of the centerline. 1. Tap <EXIT> <NeXT> <RL> <YES>.

Figure 5-82 Right Template

2. Press <NeXT> <RIGHT>. This shows the left template.

Figure 5-83 Left Template

3. Tap <PREV> or <NEXT> to move up or down through the stations.

230

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 5-84 Navigate through the Stations

This example has demonstrated how to edit any template or add any template to the control file. Once this is done, you are ready to go to the field and set slope stakes; reference point stakes, grade stakes, and property line stakes; and collect cross-section data.

Slope Staking
The goal of slope staking is to place stakes in the correct locations and put information on the stakes that will help those operating earth moving equipment to know where the earth needs to be moved. The stake is either placed at the catch point (intersection of the template and the existing ground) or at a reference location offset from the catch point. The information put on the stake varies among survey crews, so the SMI software provides several different types of information. This example will demonstrate some of the features of SMIs slope staking functions. It assumes that you have entered the horizontal and vertical control using the HARVICK example in this chapter. Entering the templates in the previous examples is not required because this example will enter the template you will be using. 1. Press <CONST> (Allegro I key, Titan J key, JETT Q key) <NeXT> <TMPL> to get in the Template Viewer. 2. Tap <EDIT> to start the Template Editor. 3. Type 450 and tap <STA> to start editing the template at station 4+50.

231

This new template is a copy of the template at the previous station. You will change it to match the template in the figure below:

Figure 5-85 Station 4+50

4. Type 1 and tap <SEG1> to edit the first segment. 5. Press <Esc> to clear the previous slope and distance, and type 4 a <+/-> <SPACE> 12 and press ! (you do not need to press the a key with the JETT). 6. Tap <SEG2>. 7. Press <Esc> to clear the previous entry, and type 6 a <+/-> <SPACE> 8 and press ! (you do not need to press the a key with the JETT). 8. Tap <DITCH>. 9. Press <Esc> to clear the previous entry, and type 2 <SPACE> 10 <SPACE> 4 and press !.

Figure 5-86 Template at Station 4+50

10. Press <SETUP> (Allegro F key, Titan G key, JETT J key). 11. Key in 12 and tap <OCPY>. 232 SMI Version 8 User Guide

12. Key in 5 and tap <BKPT>. Now, shoot a benchmark. 13. Press <SETUP> <NeXT> <BM>, key in 100 <SPACE> 89 <SPACE> 0, and press !.

Figure 5-87 Benchmark

14. Key in 100 and tap <EL?>.

Figure 5-88 Occupied Point

Try staking station 5+00 at station 50 right. 15. Press <CONST> . 16. Key in 500 <SPACE> 50 and tap <FS>.

Figure 5-89 Stake Station 5+00

17. Point the instrument at the prism and tap <STKS>. For Manual mode, key in 114 <SPACE> 89 <SPACE> 303 and press !.

233

Figure 5-90 Station Stakeout Menu

Now, find slope stake information. 18. Tap <SSTK>.

Figure 5-91 Slope Stake Information

19. Have the rodman move out about 6 feet and take another shot by tapping <SHOT>. For Manual mode, key in 109 <SPACE> 89 <SPACE> 301.30 and press !.

Figure 5-92 Slope Stake Menu

<BRKC> / <BRKR> and <BRKI> represent three ways that data can be displayed by SMI. Each refers to cuts and fills and distances from the catch point or from the centerline. With any of these options you have enough information to write on the slope stake so that the grader operator can grade from the catch point to the centerline of the road. The best way to learn is to practice. 20. Tap <CATCH>. The catch point is at the intersection of the template and the existing ground. In other words, it is where the grader can stop cutting or filling. 234 SMI Version 8 User Guide

Notice that when you pressed <CATCH>, the station was rounded to the nearest station, which is 5+00. The angle right, go/come, and left/right values put you on the even station. If you do not want the stations rounded, set the station tolerance to 0 in the Construction Options menu (<CONST> <NeXT> <NeXT> <OPT> <STAT>). Change the station interval (<STAI>) in the same menu to control which stations will be rounded. The default is to round to every station evenly divisible by 1+00 if within 5 feet of that station (round to every station ending with +00).

Figure 5-93 Catch Point Menu

21. Tap <STOSH> to store the last shot taken to a point. It is stored to point 13, the current next number. Now, shoot a reference point. 22. Tap <CUTS> to store the last shot in the cutsheet file. The following record is stored: STATION 5+00.00 OFFSET 56.02 GRADE 100.16 SHOT 100.16 CUT/FILL F 0.00 SHOULDER NOTE

23. Press <REFPT> to stake a reference point offset 10 feet from the catch point. If you key in an offset value before tapping <REFPT>, that value is used instead.

Figure 5-94 Reference Point Menu

24. Tap <SHOT>, then key in 103 <SPACE> 89.25 <SPACE> 303 and press !. 235

Figure 5-95 Shot Data

Now, display the reference point stake information. 25. Press <NeXT> <BRKC>.

Figure 5-96 Breakpoints from Catch

26. Tap <BRKR>.

Figure 5-97 Breakpoints from Shot

27. Tap <BRKI>.

Figure 5-98 Station 2+00 Template

236

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Cutsheet Files
The cutsheet file stores information about stations and offsets, their grade elevations, and depending on the application, it may also store the shot elevation, cut/fill values, and shoulder information. The cutsheet can be viewed in the data collector by pressing <CONST> <NeXT> <CUTS> <VIEW>. Individual entries in the cutsheet file cannot be edited or deleted. There are <CUTS> soft keys in various menus that store the current information to the current cutsheet. The current cutsheet has the same name as the current chain file. The cutsheet is deleted when the chain it is associated with is deleted. The cutsheet file can be sent to a PC using SMI Transfer.

Automatically Generating Cutsheet Files

The Auto Cutsheet function can generate offsets and elevations for a range of stations. The offset can be either a constant offset or an offset can be generated for the centerline and all breaks in the template on both the right and left sides. The following example assumes that you have entered the HARVICK example in this chapter up to this point. 1. Press <CONST> <NeXT> <NeXT> <AUTO> to start the Auto Cutsheet menu. 2. Key in 0, then tap <BEG> 400 <END> 100 <INTVL> 0 <OFFST>. This indicates you are storing offsets and elevations for each breakpoint in the templates at stations 0+00 through 4+00. If an offset other than 0 had been entered, only that offset and elevation would be generated at each station. 3. Tap <CUTS>. This stores the indicated entries to the cutsheet. If <COOR> had been pressed instead of, or in addition to, tapping <CUTS>, points with coordinates at each of the stations and offsets and grade elevations would have been stored. When sent to a PC using SMI Transfer, the cutsheet file looks like this: STATION SHOULDER 0+00.00 0+00.00 0+00.00 0+00.00 0+00.00 0+00.00 OFFSET NOTE 0.00 -12.00 -20.00 -30.00 12.00 20.00 GRADE 100.00 99.76 99.28 94.28 99.76 99.28 237 SHOT CUT/FILL

0+00.00 1+00.00 1+00.00 1+00.00 1+00.00 1+00.00 1+00.00 1+00.00 2+00.00 2+00.00 2+00.00 2+00.00 2+00.00 2+00.00 2+00.00 3+00.00 3+00.00 3+00.00 3+00.00 3+00.00 3+00.00 3+00.00 3+00.00 3+00.00 4+00.00 4+00.00 4+00.00 4+00.00 4+00.00 4+00.00 4+00.00

30.00 0.00 -12.00 -20.00 -30.00 12.00 20.00 30.00 0.00 -12.00 -20.00 -30.00 12.00 20.00 30.00 0.00 -12.00 -12.01 -18.01 -18.02 12.00 12.01 18.01 18.02 0.00 -12.00 -18.00 -18.01 12.00 18.00 18.01

94.28 104.00 103.64 103.16 98.16 103.64 103.16 98.16 108.00 107.52 107.04 102.04 107.52 107.04 102.04 112.00 111.76 112.26 112.50 112.49 111.76 112.26 112.50 112.49 116.00 115.76 115.28 115.27 115.76 115.28 115.27

Figure 5-99 Cutsheet File

Spirals
SMI Construction requires entry of the TS, PI, ST, Radius, SLB, and SLA. The TS, PI, and ST are actually only used to define the tangents of the two spirals. It then calculates the position of the spirals and compares the computed ST and TS to the entered points. If they are different by more than the horizontal tolerance, you are prompted to overwrite the points or store them to a new point number. If you expect the TS and ST points entered to be exactly correct and are prompted to overwrite them, you should store

238

SMI Version 8 User Guide

them to a different point number and then inverse between the entered and newly-stored points to see how far they are apart. If they are far apart, the spiral may have been entered incorrectly.

Figure 5-100 Spirals Types of Spirals

Type Simple Spiral Description Connects and is tangent to a straight line and a circular arc. The radius of the spiral at the TS is infinite and at the arc is equal to the radius of the arc. The method used in SMI software to compute the spiral can be referred to as a clothoid, Euler spiral, American spiral, or transition spiral. Other easement curves not supported by SMI are cubic parabola, lemniscate, Searles, and A.R.E.A. 10 chord spirals. Connects and is tangent to two arcs. The radius of the spiral at the two arcs is equal to the radius of each arc. Currently not supported in SMIs Construction. Connects and is tangent to a straight line and a circular arc. The radius of the spiral at the TS is not infinite and at the arc is equal to the radius of the arc. Currently not supported in SMIs Construction.

Combining Spiral Compound Spiral

Entering a Single Spiral

Sometimes it is useful to enter just one spiral instead of an arc inside two spirals, as is usually the case. To enter the spiral in Figure 5-101 on page 240 enter: {TS PIs SC Radius SLB 0}.

239

Figure 5-101 Single Spiral

One way the PIs (PI of the spiral) can be calculated is from the TS using the tangent direction and the line perpendicular to the CC at the SC. The Radius is the radius of the arc.

Entering a Spiral and an Arc

To enter a spiral and an arc: {TS PI PT Radius SLB 0} If coming from the other direction: {PT PI TS Radius 0 SLB}

Figure 5-102 Spiral and Arc

Spiral Program
A simple spiral solver can be used by turning on ALPHA, typing SPIRAL, and pressing !. Enter the Radius, SLB, SLA, and I (angle between tangents) to get some basic information about the two spirals on the stack:

X1 Y1 Xo1 o1 Tangent1 X2 Y2 Xo2 o2 Tangent2

240

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 5-103 SPIRAL Program

o1 and o2 are sometimes called the throw. Xo1 and o1 define a point called the offset T.C.

241

ROBOTIC AND GPS FUNCTIONS

In this chapter: Supported Robotic Equipment...........................................244 Robotic Functions ..............................................................244 Notes About Using SMI with Robotic Total Stations .........246 GPS Functions...................................................................247

CHAPTER

243

The robotic functions are designed to work with robotic instruments as a tool to enable a one-man or twoman crew, rather than a two- or three-man crew. Another feature is the ability of the software to continuously update the screen while staking or slope staking without pressing any additional keys. You need to own the Construction with GPS/Robotics (CVR) or Data Collection with GPS/Robotics (DCR) program to access the following functions.

Supported Robotic Equipment

Supports all standard instruments plus the following instruments optimized for one-man operation: Leica TCA Series Topcon AP-L1A, 800 and 8000 series instruments Geodimeter 600 series instruments Trimble 5600 Series instruments Zeiss Elta S20

Robotic Functions
Auto Shots
This function uses the robotics of the instrument to automatically do as many sets as specified.

Procedure
1. Set up a prism at the backsight and each point to be shot. 2. Sight on the backsight in the front face (Zenith~90), press <0> (zero key), and tap <BS>. 3. Sight on the foresight and tap <SHOT>. Repeat this step for every foresight. 4. Type the number of total sets to turn and tap <AUTO>. The current set is finished and then additional sets are performed.

244

SMI Version 8 User Guide

5. Key in 1 to finish the current set.

Real-time Side Shot

This function records a side shot whenever the rod moves farther than the minimum distance from the last shot taken. The current distance from the last stored point is displayed until a new point is stored. The default minimum distance is 10. To change the minimum distance, type it in before pressing c <RSIDS> (the 5 key, JETT c M). ! If the prism pole is not completely level before the measurement is recorded, it might create a problem. Therefore, you may key in a negative sign before the distance so the data collector prompts you to store the side shot when the distance from the last point is reached. This should also give you time to level the prism before storing the shot. (+) Distance = automatic storage (-) Distance = user confirmed storage

Real-time Stakeout
The <SHOT> soft key in any of the Stakeout menus takes a single measurement. Pressing a <SHOT> starts the Real-time Stakeout function. Every time a new measurement is completed, the Go/Come, Left/Right values are updated. To stop measuring, quickly press <Esc> <Esc> . See Graphical Stakeout in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information.

Rezero
Press the a <RE-0> keys from within any of the menus, sight on the backsight, and set the horizontal angle to zero. After setting the backsight to zero, the program displays the horizontal angle error and stores it in the raw data file if raw data is on. ! This routine assumes that the unshifted <ZERO> key was used previously to set the horizontal angle to zero and record the location of the backsight.

Instrument Servo Positioning Screen

A servo positioning screen is assigned to the c <POS> (Allegro ESC key, Titan SP key, JETT c J) keys. The positioning screen is helpful anytime that tracking of the prism needs to be established. The screen shows live updates for angles, distance (if available), battery strength (if available), and tracking

245

information. If there are problems in communicating with the instrument, the message POSITION

DATA NOT AVAILABLE displays.

See Instrument Position in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information.

Robot Servo Menu

This menu allows you to change instrument options and control servo operations for any instrument that has servo abilities. See Robot Servo Menu in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information.

Angle Turning
Angle turning is done by using the directional arrows in the center of the Allegro or by using the arrows on the upper right of the Titan. Instrument Specific Notes For Geodimeter, Trimble, and Zeiss instruments, key in an angle before pressing a direction key. The instrument turns by that number of degrees. If no angle is given, the previous angle is used again. The default angle is 3. For Leica and Topcon instruments, key in a number between 1 and 5 to indicate the speed of the turn. Press any key to stop turning. If no number is given, the previous number is used. The default number is 3.

Other Robotic Features

Two-Point Free Station (<2pfs>), Mean Backsight (<mbs>), Trig Leveling (<trig>), and Benchmark (<bm>) all turn the instrument to the correct face when taking direct and reverse shots.

Notes About Using SMI with Robotic Total Stations

How to avoid an error at 30 feet. It is possible for a 10-foot error to occur with some robotic instruments when you take a shot at about 30 feet if the instrument sees two of the prisms on the 360 prism set instead of one. Increase speed and accuracy using <2pfs>.

246

SMI Version 8 User Guide

It is more desirable to use the Two Point Free Station function when using a robotic total station than to set on a known point and backsight a known point. Using 0.00 for H ROD sometimes works best. If you have a rod reading other than 0.00 while working with elevations and free station resection, set this value at ROD A and ROD B in the <2pfs> program (<SETUP> <NeXT> <2PFS> <NeXT>). Using AUTO for multiple shots to one or more points. If you want to take multiple shots to multiple points, set a prism at the backsight point and each foresight point. Use <OCPY> <BKPT> to occupy the robot at the backsight prism and press <SETUP> <NeXT> <SHOTS> <ZERO> <BS>. Turn to each foresight point and tap <SHOT>. After the last foresight point, press <NeXT> <AUTO>. If you wish to have the robot automatically finish the set and do one more set, type 1 and tap <AUTO>. Now you may relax while the robot is directed by SMI to automatically finish all sets to all points and display the results. Tap <STPTS> to store the meaned coordinate position of each point. If Raw Data is on, SMIs modified raw data of each shot is also stored.

GPS Functions
GPS Status Screen
The screen shows a live update of the current HMS latitude, HMS longitude, number of satellites, seconds since the last differential correction radio message (link), position quality (5 is RTK fixed), HDOP, VDOP, horizontal error estimate, and vertical error estimate. The GPS status screen does not change the current menu. ! When using the text form of the POS command and you press any key, the status screen disappears and the key function is executed. For the Graphical POS command, you must tap Close. See GPS Menu and GPS Diagnostics in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information.

247

Figure 6-1 GPS Status Screen (Text Version)

Figure 6-2 GPS Status Screen (Graphical Version)

GPS Average Shots

The data collector can average several measurements from the receiver to get a more precise position. Anytime the data collector needs to get a position from the receiver, and REPS (press <GPS> <OPT> <REPS>) is set to a number other than 1, the GPS Average Shots screen appears to show the progress of the collection of the measurements. Individual measurements that do not meet the current tolerance settings are not used. A lot of useful information about how close together the positions being collected are is shown, along with some soft keys that give you several options while the positions are coming in. After the shots specified have been measured, the shots are averaged and used. If the horizontal and/or vertical standard deviation tolerances have been set in the GPS Tolerance menu ( <GPS> <tol> <hsdev> and/or <vsdev>), the standard deviations are compared to the tolerance values. If the standard deviation tolerances are not met, you are prompted to decide whether to use or discard the results. See Repetitions in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information on GPS Averaging.

248

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 6-3 GPS Average Shots Screen

249

GUIDE TO GPS
In this chapter: How GPS Works.................................................................... 252 How SMI Makes RTK GPS Easy...........................................254 State Plane Conversion......................................................... 255 GPS Setup Using an Assumed Coordinate (Geodetic BS) ... 257 GPS Setup Using Two Known Points.................................... 259 GPS Setup Using One Point and a Reference Angle ........... 264 GPS Setup Using State Plane Coordinates .......................... 266 GPS Setup Using a State Plane Benchmark ........................ 270 GPS Setup Using a Local Benchmark................................... 271 GPS Setup Using Multiple Rovers......................................... 272 GPS Setup Using an Independent Receiver ......................... 275 GPS Data Collection.............................................................. 286 GPS Staking .......................................................................... 288 Static Post Processing........................................................... 290 Raw Data Generated by GPS Routines ................................ 309

CHAPTER

251

How GPS Works

The Global Positioning System (GPS) operated by the United States has 24 satellites circling 12,000 miles above the earth every 12 hours. They are arranged in six orbital planes inclined at 55 degrees, such that at least four satellites are always visible. Each satellite transmits signals on two different frequencies. These signals contain the time the signal was sent and the location of the satellite. A GPS receiver uses the signals from the satellites to triangulate its position. Less sophisticated receivers only use one of the frequencies. Dual-frequency receivers use both frequencies and can achieve higher accuracy. At least four satellites are needed to calculate a three-dimensional position. If the position is calculated without any other information, it is called an autonomous position or stand-alone position.

Figure 7-1 Single Receiver (Autonomous Mode)

This stand-alone position can be improved by using corrections provided by a receiver in a known stationary location. Combining the satellite data with correction data is called Differential GPS (DGPS). One example of a DGPS system is the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS). Stationary monitoring stations track the data coming from the GPS satellites and calculate corrections. These corrections are transmitted to a geosynchronous satellite over North America. This satellite then broadcasts the corrections for the benefit of WAAS capable receivers. For example, the SMI Flex GPS system is capable of sub meter autonomous positioning accuracy with WAAS. The StarFire equipped SMI Flex GPS receivers are capable of sub decimeter (4 inch) autonomous positioning accuracy!

252

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 7-2 WAAS

Real Time Kinematic (RTK) is a special type of DGPS. It achieves very high accuracy by using a reference station within 5 - 30 km. The reference station or base receiver transmits corrections to a mobile receiver (rover) that is able to use the corrections. The corrections are typically transmitted using data radios. The rover has to be receiving corrections once a second for at least five satellites that the rover is tracking to achieve RTK mode.

Figure 7-3 Real Time Kinetic (RTK)

Most GPS receivers calculate their position in reference to the WGS84 ellipsoid model of the earth (the SMI Flex GPS receiver with StarFire uses the current epoch ITRF when in autonomous mode). Coordinates on this ellipsoid are represented by a latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height (distance above or below the surface of the ellipsoid). Transforming these coordinates on the ellipsoid to a flat coordinate system on the surface of the earth can be a challenge. There are many predefined conversions from WGS84 to grid-based coordinate systems. The State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS) is an example of a coordinate system that has well-defined conversions to get to and from WGS84 coordinates. Because there is a predefined conversion, getting an RTK system oriented to a State Plane Coordinate system is as simple as putting the base receiver on a known point. The WGS84 ellipsoid model elevations do not exactly match mean sea level elevations. A Geoid file contains a grid of the differences and is used to convert from an ellipsoid height to mean sea level elevation. Various different Geoid files have been made. The most recent one in the United States is Geoid03.

253

However, many surveyors are used to defining a local coordinate system based on ground distances. The typical approach to mapping from GPS coordinates to a local ground system is to project onto a predefined flat system that has a scale factor and then measure several control points so that a best fit approximation can be made between the scaled system and the local system. The problem with this approach is that setup is much more difficult than using a total station, both in terms of time and expertise required and in some cases, in some software programs it requires a trip back to the office to calculate the local projection.

How SMI Makes RTK GPS Easy

One of the goals of the SMI Flex GPS system is to make using GPS as easy as using a total station. Why is it so easy to use a total station regardless of the coordinate system in which it is used? Because a total station simply provides a difference in position between where it is and where the prism is. Since the data collector knows where the total station is and the backsight angle, it can use that difference in position to calculate a position in whatever coordinate system is being used. As strange as it may sound at first, an RTK GPS system has some similarities to a total station. The strength of RTK GPS is that it can tell you the difference in position between the base and rover with great accuracy. Sound familiar? That is just what a total station does. If we think of the GPS base receiver as a total station and the GPS rover receiver as a prism, our approach to GPS becomes easy to understand. If you compare it to a robotic total station, the analogy is perfect. You are using the data collector at the rod while your base station is sending data to you via a radio modem. We threw out the "typical approach" and came up with a method that we think is completely unique (although a couple of companies have attempted to copy it). The data collector calculates the inverse between the base receiver and rover receiver. That inverse or vector is then used in SMIs standard routines that are also used with total stations. This means that you use the same buttons and functions for GPS as you do with your total station. An added benefit is that this approach makes it easy to switch back and forth between using GPS and a total station as the situation dictates. The main difference between using GPS and a total station is when you are first setting up. We have worked hard to make that easy, too. You tell the data collector which brand of GPS receiver you are using, connect to the base receiver, tap <base>, and tell the data collector if you are occupying a known point. The last step is to connect to the rover receiver and tap <rover>. That is only two more functions than you would use when setting up a total station. From there you can do the same things to set up as you would with a total station: occupy, backsight, two-point free station, and benchmark. Much more detail about getting set up can be found in GPS Setup Using an Assumed Coordinate on page 257. The data collector uses tolerance values that prevent substandard measurements from being used. You can also set it to average measurements to increase accuracy. You can set tolerances for RTK quality,

254

SMI Version 8 User Guide

horizontal error, vertical error, horizontal and vertical standard deviation, HDOP, and VDOP. If a tolerance is exceeded, the data collector shows the bad value and continues to try to collect a good measurement.

State Plane Conversion

The SMI state plane conversion functions provide the ability to convert geodetic locations from one coordinate system to another. The 37 currently supported projections are listed below. Several variations of these projections are also supported. Support for new projections may be added on request. Call for the latest information. Alber's Equal Area American Polyconic Bonne Cassini Cylindrical Danish System 34 Eckert IV Eckert VI Equal Area Cylindrical Transverse Aspect Equal Area Cylindrical, Normal Aspect Equidistant Conic Equidistant Cylindrical Gnomonic Goode Homolosine Hotine Oblique Mercator Krovak Oblique Conformal Conic Lambert Conformal Conic Lambert Equal Area Azimuthal Lambert Equidistant Azimuthal Lambert Tangential Mercator Miller Cylindrical Modified Polyconic Modified Stereographic Mollweide New Zealand National Grid System Non-Georeferenced Coordinates Oblique Bipolar Conic Oblique Cylindrical Oblique Stereographic Orthographic 255

Polar Stereographic Robinson Sinusoidal Snyder Transverse Mercator Snyder's Oblique Stereographic Transverse Mercator Van der Grinten

Currently Supported Projections

The SMI state plane conversion commands provide a quick and very accurate means to convert between coordinate systems based on any of the above projections. The commands are capable of performing generalized datum shifts from one geodetic reference system to another. Datum shifts between the North American Datums of 1927 and 1983 are performed using the same algorithm as the National Geodetic Survey's NADCON program and produce numerical results identical to NADCON. NADCON has been generally accepted as the standard for NAD27 to NAD83 conversions. Datum shifts using the Version 1 or Version 2 Canadian National Transformation are also supported. We cannot, however, provide you with the required data file(s). You must obtain such from Geodetic Survey Division, Geomatics Canada. High Accuracy Reference Network (HARN), also known as High Precision GPS Network (HPGN) and NAD83/91, is also fully supported, producing identical numerical results as those of the NADCON program. For more information on HARN and HPGN, see High Accuracy Reference Network. The state plane conversion tools also include a Coordinate System Dictionary with more than 1,000 coordinate systems defined, a Datum Dictionary with more than 130 local geodetic reference systems defined, an Ellipsoid Dictionary with 40+ ellipsoids defined, and commands to maintain all three dictionaries. SMIs state plane conversion software also includes the ability to compute the geoid height (or separation if you prefer) for any point covered by the GEOID96, GEOID99, and GEOID03 and Ordinance Survey data files. Future releases may add additional file formats, therefore expanding the geographic coverage. SMIs state plane conversion software also includes provisions for a 38th "projection." Not really a projection in any cartographic sense, it is a programming technique to enable latitude and longitude results to be obtained and for these results to: 5. Use units other than the internal standard of degrees 6. Have an origin other than Greenwich (such as the meridian of Paris). Thus, projection functions exist for this thirty-eighth projection, what we call the Unity Projection, which does little more than convert the units of latitude and longitude to the desired result.

256

SMI Version 8 User Guide

GPS Setup Using an Assumed Coordinate (Geodetic BS)

Scenario: A new job where no points or monuments on or near the site are known. The alignment of the data file will be to Geodetic North. 1. Locate a point on the site with a clear view of the sky and away from devices which would produce electrical noise. 2. Set up the GPS base station and radio system according to the supplied procedures. 3. Press <GPS> (the Z key) to display the GPS screen. The line of the display labeled PRJTN should show LOCAL COORDINATES. If it does not, tap <OPT> to start the GPS Options menu. Tap <SPC> to toggle to <LOCAL>. Then, tap <exit> to go back to the GPS screen.

Figure 7-4 Local Coordinates Screen

4. Wait for the GPS receiver to begin tracking satellites. SMI Flex GPS Users: Wait until the green or green and amber GPS lights are blinking. This position will typically be within two feet of truth. If you are using the StarFire system without a known monument (like in this procedure), waiting as little as 3045 minutes will produce a position within 4" of truth! Press <POS> (Allegro c ESC key, Titan a SP key, JETT c J key) to view the current H. Error. 5. Connect the data collector cable (usually connected to COM 1) to the GPS receivers control COM port. SMI Flex GPS Users: This is Com 2 on the NavCom receiver. 6. Tap <BASE>. 7. Type 1 when prompted for a base point number and press !.

257

This sets the base at the coordinates of point 1, which is 5000, 5000, 100, unless you've changed the default coordinates for a new job in SMI. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios. If you are not using external radios, skip to step 9. 8. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. Satel Epic's are typically 19200 (the current baud rate displays on the radios LED). Pacific Crest PDL's are typically 38400. Pacific Crest RX's are typically 9600.

SMI Flex GPS Users: If you said <YES> to using external radios, you are prompted Turn internals off?. Leaving both the internal and external radios on allows you the option to switch radio systems at the rover without having to reconfigure the base again. 9. Disconnect the data collector from the base receiver and attach it to the rover pole, connecting all the appropriate cables as explained in step 5. Be sure the rover receiver is on and tracking satellites SMI Flex GPS Users: Wait until the green or green and amber GPS lights are blinking. The position will typically be within two feet of truth. 10. Tap <ROVER>. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios; otherwise skip to step 12. 11. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. 12. Press <POS> (Allegro c ESC key, Titan a SP key, JETT c J key) to see the Instrument Status screen. Wait for the displayed solution type to be Q5, which indicates fixed RTK mode. If Q5 has not been obtained after a few minutes, see Rover Not in Q5 RTK Fixed Mode in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual. 13. Set another reference point to use in the future. This second reference point should be far enough away that you will maintain good angular accuracy with the entire site and being visible to the current point is beneficial if you decide to use your total station on the job. Your RTK GPS system is now ready to collect data.

258

SMI Version 8 User Guide

! There is no need to backsight or zero the data collector because Geodetic North is currently being used. During future visits to the site you will want to backsight the second position to perfectly match this setup. ! The elevation of the base point is actually x.xx feet/meters lower than 100.0. Where x.xx is the antenna height of the base receiver. This is only important if you are not using a fixed height base tripod system.

GPS Setup Using Two Known Points

There are two methods of doing a local coordinate system setup when there are at least two known points. They are described in the following two sections. If you are using State Plane Coordinates, see GPS Setup Using State Plane Coordinates on page 266.

Occupy and Backsight

Scenario: A field survey where two known points are already stored in the data collector. The base will be put on one point and the other point will be used to establish the rotation of the local coordinates from Geodetic North. Note: The base point in this scenario is assumed to be the point that has a clear (unobstructed) view of the sky. 1. Set up the GPS base station and radio system according to the supplied procedures. 2. Press <GPS> to display the GPS screen. The line of the display labeled PRJTN should show LOCAL COORDINATES. If it does not, tap <OPT> to start the GPS Options menu. Tap <SPC> to toggle to <local>. Then, tap <EXIT> to go back to the GPS menu. 3. Connect the data collector cable (usually connected to COM 1) to the GPS receivers control COM port. SMI Flex GPS Users: This is Com 2 on the NavCom receiver. 4. Wait for the GPS receiver to begin tracking satellites. SMI Flex GPS Users: Wait until the green or green and amber GPS lights are blinking. This position will typically be within two feet of truth. If you are using the StarFire system without a known state plane coordinate (like in this procedure), waiting as little as 3045 minutes will

259

produce a position within 4" of truth. Press <POS> to view the current H. Error. Also, see StarFire Settings for entry of local WGS84 to ITRF displacement entry. 5. If using the elevation of the base point, measure the distance from the point to the bottom of the base receiver. Press <SETUP> , type in the measured height, and tap <HI>. ! If the base and rover pole heights are the same, the HI and HROD values can be left at 0 because they offset each other. 6. If using the elevation at the base point, measure the distance from the ground to the bottom of the rover receiver. Press <SETUP> , type in the measured height, and tap <HROD>. ! If the base and rover pole heights are the same, the HI and HROD values can be left at 0 because they offset each other. 7. If using the elevation at another point, see GPS Setup Using a Local Benchmark on page 271 after finishing these steps to establish accurate elevations. 8. Tap <BASE>. 9. Type the point number of the point on which the base resides and press !. 10. Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios. Type 19200 and press !, unless the radio is set to a different baud rate. 11. Disconnect the data collector from the base receiver and attach it to the rover pole. 12. Be sure the rover receiver is on and tracking satellites. SMI Flex GPS Users: Connect the data collector cable coming from COM 2 on the NavCom receiver to COM 1 on the data collector. 13. Tap <ROVER>. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios; otherwise skip to step 15. 14. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. 15. Press <POS> to see the Instrument Status screen. Wait for the displayed solution type to be Q5, which indicates fixed RTK mode. If Q5 has not been obtained after a few minutes, see Rover Not in Q5 RTK Fixed Mode in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual. 260 SMI Version 8 User Guide

16. Press <BKPT> (Allegro D key, Titan E key, JETT c U), type in the second known point, and press !. 17. Put the rover on the point and press c <ZERO> (the 0 key). The data collector measures the location and calculates a rotation angle for the job. 18. Press <SETUP> to display the Setup screen and view the rotation angle shown as the backsight angle. The rotation angle is how much the local coordinates are rotated from Geodetic North. Make a note of the rotation angle so you can use it later. See GPS Setup Using One Point and a Reference Angle on page 264 for more information. Your RTK GPS system is now ready to collect data. ! If you choose to, you can use the same rotation angle throughout the job instead of recalculating it every time the GPS equipment is set up. See GPS Setup Using One Point and a Reference Angle on page 264 for more information. ! If the occupied point or back azimuth (rotation angle) gets changed by manual calculations or by using a total station after doing a GPS setup, you can get the data collector reoriented to the GPS setup by entering the occupied point using <OCCUPY> (Allegro E key, Titan F key, JETT c Q) and the rotation angle by pressing <SETUP> <NeXT> <NeXT> <BKAZ>. It is not necessary to reconnect the data collector to the base.

Two-Point Free Station

Scenario: A field survey where two known points are already stored in the data collector. The base will be put on an unknown point. The coordinates of the base and rotation will be established by performing a Two-Point Free Station. Note: The reason that this method is used over the Occupy and Backsight method is that you can place the base at a location for ideal viewing of the satellites which may not be available on an existing control point. 1. Setup the GPS base station and radio system according to the supplied procedures. 2. Press <GPS> to start the GPS menu. The line of the display labeled PRJTN should show LOCAL COORDINATES. If it does not, tap <OPT> to start the GPS Options menu. Tap on <SPC> to toggle to <LOCAL>. Then, tap <EXIT> to go back to the GPS menu.

261

3. Connect the data collector cable (usually connected to COM 1) to the GPS Receivers control COM port. SMI Flex GPS Users: This is Com 2 on the NavCom receiver. 4. Wait for the GPS receiver to begin tracking satellites. SMI Flex GPS Users: Wait until the green or green and amber GPS lights are blinking. This position will typically be within two feet of truth. If you are using the StarFire system without a known state plane coordinate (like in this procedure), waiting as little as 3045 minutes will produce a position within 4" of truth. Press <POS> . Tap <BASE>. 5. Type 0 and press !. The point number of the base will be established later. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios. If you are not using external radios, skip to step 7. 6. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. Satel Epic's are typically 19200 (the current baud rate displays on the radios LED). Pacific Crest PDL's are typically 38400. Pacific Crest RX's are typically 9600.

SMI Flex GPS Users: If you said <YES> to using external radios, you are prompted to Turn internals off?. Leaving both the internal and external radios on allows you the option to switch radio systems at the rover without having to reconfigure the base again. 7. Disconnect the data collector from the base receiver and attach it to the rover pole. 8. Be sure the rover receiver is on and tracking satellites. SMI Flex GPS Users: Connect the data collector cable coming from COM 2 on the NavCom receiver to COM 1 on the data collector. 9. Tap <ROVER>. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios; otherwise skip to step 11. 10. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !.

262

SMI Version 8 User Guide

11. Press <POS> to see the Instrument Status screen. Wait for the displayed solution type to be Q5, which indicates fixed RTK mode. If Q5 has not been obtained after a few minutes, see Rover Not in Q5 RTK Fixed Mode in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual. 12. Press <2PFS> (Allegro H key, Titan I key, JETT c Z key) to start the Two-Point Free Station menu. Make sure the <HOLD> / <REAL> / <scale> soft key toggle is set to <REAL>. This means a scale factor of 1 will be used. If the coordinates you are using have a scale factor, set it to <scale> and the data collector will automatically calculate the scale based on the control points.

Figure 7-5 Free Station Screen

13. To dramatically improve the accuracy of the Two-Point Free Station, increase the repetitions that are used by pressing <GPS> <OPT> <REPS>, typing 60, and pressing !. ! The number of reps needed varies from GPS manufacturer to manufacturer, and depends on local environmental conditions and satellite coverage. Setting reps to 0 (zero) allows you to monitor the precision of the shot, allowing you to determine the time required. 14. Put the rover on the first known point. Type in the point number and tap <ADIR>. The data collector measures the location and shows the measured inverse from the base location. 15. Put the rover on the second known point. Type in the point number and tap <BDIR>. The data collector measures the location and shows the measured inverse from the base. 16. Tap <RSLTS>. The precision should be over 10,000 (30,000 and higher is very good). Very low precision (10 or lower) probably indicates the wrong point numbers were entered

263

Figure 7-6 Free Station Precision

17. Tap <store> to store the coordinates of the base. Make a note of the point number used. 18. Press <SETUP> to start the Setup screen and see the rotation angle shown as the backsight angle. The rotation angle is how much the local coordinates are rotated from Geodetic North. Make a note of the rotation angle so you can use it later. Your RTK GPS System is now ready to collect data. ! If the occupied point or back azimuth (rotation angle) gets changed by manual calculations or by using a total station after doing a GPS setup, you can get the data collector reoriented to the GPS setup by entering the occupied point using <OCCUPY>, and the rotation angle by pressing <SETUP> <NeXT> <NeXT> <BKAZ>. It is not necessary to reconnect the data collector to the base.

GPS Setup Using One Point and a Reference Angle

Scenario: A field survey where the base will be put on a known point and the rotation of the local coordinates from Geodetic North is known. 1. Set up the GPS base station and radio system according to the supplies procedures. 2. Press <GPS> to start the GPS menu. The line of the display labeled PRJTN should show LOCAL COORDINATES. If it does not, tap <OPT> to start the GPS Options menu. Tap <SPC> to toggle to <LOCAL>. Then, tap <exit> to go back to the GPS menu. 3. Wait for the GPS receiver to begin tracking satellites. 264 SMI Version 8 User Guide

SMI Flex GPS Users: Wait until the green or green and amber GPS lights are blinking. This position will typically be within two feet of truth. If you are using the StarFire system with out a known monument (like in this procedure), waiting as little as 3045 minutes will produce a position within 4" of truth! Press <POS> to view the current H. Error. 4. Connect the data collector cable (usually connected to COM 1) to the GPS receivers control COM port. SMI Flex GPS Users: This is Com 2 on the NavCom receiver. 5. If using the elevation at the base point, measure the distance from the point to the bottom of the base receiver. Press <SETUP> , type in the measured height, and tap <HI>. ! If the base and rover pole heights are the same, the HI and HROD values can be left at 0 because they offset each other. 6. If using the elevation at the base point, measure the distance from the ground to the bottom of the rover receiver. Press <SETUP> , type in the measured height, and tap <HROD>. ! If the base and rover pole heights are the same, the HI and HROD values can be left at 0 because they offset each other. ! If using the elevation at another point, see GPS Setup Using a Local Benchmark on page 271 after finishing these steps to establish accurate elevations. 7. Tap <BASE>. Type the point number of the point on which the base resides and press !. This sets the base at the coordinates of that point. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios. If you are not using external radios, skip to step 9. 8. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. Satel Epic's are typically 19200 (the current baud rate displays on the radios LED). Pacific Crest PDL's are typically 38400. Pacific Crest RX's are typically 9600.

SMI Flex GPS Users: If you said <YES> to using external radios, you are prompted to Turn internals off?. Leaving both the internal and external radios on allows you the option to switch radio systems at the rover without having to reconfigure the base again.

265

9. Disconnect the data collector from the base receiver and attach it to the rover pole, connecting all the appropriate cables as explained in step 4. Be sure the rover receiver is on and tracking satellites. SMI Flex GPS Users: Wait until the green or green and amber GPS lights are blinking. 10. Tap <ROVER>. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios; otherwise skip to step 12 since the internal Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum radios are preconfigured. 11. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. 12. Press <POS> to see the Instrument Status screen. Wait for the displayed solution type to be Q5, which indicates fixed RTK mode. If Q5 has not been obtained after a few minutes, see Rover Not in Q5 RTK Fixed Mode in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual. 13. Press <SETUP> <NeXT> <NeXT> <BKAZ>. Type in the rotation from Geodetic North and press !. Your RTK GPS system is now ready to collect data. ! You should be careful about using the same reference angle throughout a job that spans a large east and west distance. The directions to Geodetic North at each end of the job will not be exactly parallel. Two-Point Free Station or a backsight point would be preferred in those types of jobs. ! If the occupied point or back azimuth (rotation angle) gets changed by manual calculations or by using a total station after doing a GPS setup, you can get the data collector reoriented to the GPS setup by entering the occupied point using <OCCUPY>, and the rotation angle by pressing <SETUP> <NeXT> <NeXT> <BKAZ>. It is not necessary to reconnect the data collector to the base.

GPS Setup Using State Plane Coordinates

Scenario: Your job uses State Plane Coordinates and the base station must be set up on a point with known coordinates. 1. Set up the GPS base station and radio system according to the supplied procedures.

266

SMI Version 8 User Guide

2. Press <GPS> <OPT> to display the GPS Options menu. 3. Tap <SPCS>. The Select Coordinate System dialog box displays.

Figure 7-7 Select Coordinate System

4. Select the appropriate Group that contains the coordinate system needed for this job. ! The SPCS toggle reduces the Group drop list to only US State Plane Coordinate Systems. For example UTM and World Systems are removed making your selection easier. 5. Using the Name drop list, select the appropriate coordinate system. The information text boxes below display a description of the selected coordinate system, allowing you to verify the selection. 6. If the coordinate system selected in step five is correct, press !. See Coordinate Systems in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information on the over 4000 supported systems. 7. Make sure the <SPC> / <LOCAl> soft key is set to <SPC> so that the job is in State Plane Coordinate mode instead of Local mode. The current mode is shown on the second line of the display with the label PRJTN: (Projection).

Figure 7-8 State Plane Coordinate Mode

267

8. Tap <REPS> and key in the desired number of measurements to average per shot. 30 is a good starting point for control shots. 9. Wait for the GPS receiver to begin tracking satellites. SMI Flex GPS Users: Wait until the green or green and amber GPS lights are blinking. This position will typically be within two feet of truth. If you are using the StarFire system with out a known monument (like in this procedure), waiting as little as 3045 minutes will produce a position within 4" of truth! Press <POS> to view the current H. Error. 10. Connect the data collector cable (usually connected to COM 1) to the GPS receivers control COM port. SMI Flex GPS Users: This is Com 2 on the NavCom receiver. 11. If using the elevation at the base point, measure the distance from the point to the bottom of the base receiver. Press <SETUP> , type in the measured height, and tap <HI>. ! If the base and rover pole heights are the same, the HI and HROD values can be left at 0 because they offset each other. However, if you are doing a Get Position Here, you may want to enter this information anyway to get a somewhat more accurate elevation for the job. ! If using the elevation at another point, see GPS Setup Using a State Plane Benchmark on page 270 after finishing these steps to establish accurate elevations. 12. If the point number of the base is known: Press <GPS> <BASE>. When prompted for the base point, type in the point number of the point on which the base receiver is located and press !. Use the <STO PT> command to enter and store known points in SMI. 13. If the location of the base is NOT known: Press <GPS> <BASE>. Type 0 and press !. The collector gets the current position of the antenna and saves it to a new point. Future points collected will be accurate in reference to this location, although the absolute position will be a three to seven meters off (a GPS system without WAAS could be 10 to 30 meters off). Known control points can be collected later to make doing a transformation possible. Note for SMI Flex GPS Users ! The position collected with the SMI Flex GPS RT model receivers will typically be within a foot or two of truth. ! The position collected with the SMI Flex GPS SF model receivers will typically be within 2 to 4 inches of truth both horizontally and vertically! ! You can collect static GPS data at the base at the same time it is broadcasting RTK corrections. This static log file (if at least two hours in duration) can be submitted to OPUS for 268 SMI Version 8 User Guide

processing to a couple of millimeters. See Processing Static Data on page 295 for detailed steps. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios. If you are not using external radios, skip to step 17. 14. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. Satel Epic's are typically 19200 (the current baud rate displays on the radios LED). Pacific Crest PDL's are typically 38400. Pacific Crest RX's are typically 9600.

SMI Flex GPS Users: If you said <YES> to using external radios, you are prompted to Turn internals off?. Leaving both the internal and external radios on allows you the option to switch radio systems at the rover without having to reconfigure the base again. 15. Disconnect the data collector from the base receiver and attach it to the rover pole, connecting all the appropriate cables as explained in step 10. Be sure the rover receiver is on and tracking satellites. SMI Flex GPS Users: Wait until the green or green and amber GPS lights are blinking. 16. Tap <ROVER>. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios; otherwise skip to step 20 since the internal Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum radios are pre-configured. 17. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. 18. Press <POS> to see the Instrument Status screen. Wait for the displayed solution type to be Q5, which indicates fixed RTK mode. If Q5 has not been obtained after a few minutes, see Rover Not in Q5 RTK Fixed Mode in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual. Your RTK GPS system is now ready to collect data.

269

GPS Setup Using a State Plane Benchmark

Scenario: The RTK GPS system has already been oriented to a State Plane job and is in RTK mode. A point with a known elevation will be used as an elevation reference for future measurements. ! If you plan on carrying the elevation derived from this benchmark a long distance (over a mile or two), make sure you have the Use Geoid toggle turned on prior to following the steps. 1. Press <GPS> <OPT> to see the <REPS> soft key. 2. Type in the number of measurements to average and tap <REPS>. At least 20 is recommended for vertical control. 3. Put the rover on a known elevation. 4. Type in the point number of the benchmark and press <BMRK> (Allegro G key, Titan H key, JETT a V key) to measure the elevation. After the program averages the measurements, the GPS menu displays. The EL (change in elevation) value in the display shows how much the elevation of future measurements will be changed to match the benchmark. Make sure that it seems reasonable before continuing.

Figure 7-9 State Plane Benchmark

Accurate GPS Elevations

Because all GPS-derived elevations are less accurate than the horizontal position (note the horizontal position is usually only accurate to + or - 0.03), it is important that you know a couple of things: Setting up over a point with a good known elevation is more accurate than shooting a benchmark. Multiple reps are required to obtain moderately accurate elevations

The basis for this argument is that GPS manufacturers "claim" around a +/- 15 mm + x ppm (1st Sigma or RMS both about 66%) for vertical accuracy (some systems like the SMI Flex GPS are slightly better) 270 SMI Version 8 User Guide

this equates to any one shot being +/- .05. Its even possible (40% chance) that a larger error will occur. Because this error is possible when taking one shot (the benchmark shot) this error at one shot is used to calculate the new elevation at the base which is then used to determine the elevations of all the points shot from the base. In actuality, the maximum possible error in vertical is now double the 0.05 and is 0.10 (44%) so there is a slight chance of a vertical error greater than 0.10. To eliminate this doubling of errors you can occupy a known point. Or, to reduce this error press <GPS> <opt> <REPS> to average out the error. You will need to experiment with your GPS equipment to determine the required repetitions to obtain the accuracy that you need. Also, note the VDOP when doing your tests, because a high VDOP will produce a greater range in your vertical measurements too. Thanks to Marshal Rocks for his contribution to this topic.

GPS Setup Using a Local Benchmark

Scenario: The RTK GPS system has already been oriented to a local job and is in RTK mode. A location with a known elevation will be used as an elevation reference for future measurements. ! If you plan on carrying the elevation derived from this benchmark a long distance (over a mile or two), make sure you have the Use Geoid toggle turned on prior to following the steps. ! SMI supports the following Geoids: Geoid03, Geoid99, Geoid96, and all other Ordinance Survey data files produced by the US NGS. 1. Press <GPS> (the Z key) <OPT> to see the <REPS> soft key. 2. Type in the number of measurements to average and tap <REPS>. At least 20 is recommended. 3. Put the rover on a known elevation. 4. Press <BMRK> (Allegro G key, Titan H key, JETT a V key) to measure the elevation. After the program averages the measurements, the Benchmark menu displays.

Figure 7-10 Local Benchmark

271

5. If the benchmark point number is known, type it in and tap <BMPT>. 6. If the benchmark elevation is known, type it in and tap <EL?>. The elevation of the base is adjusted so that future elevation measurements will be relative to the benchmark. The point itself has not been changed yet. 7. Type in the point number to which to store the new base point and tap <STORE>. 8. Review Accurate GPS Elevations on page 270.

GPS Setup Using Multiple Rovers

Scenario: A single base receiver is broadcasting corrections that more than one rover will be using. Two examples are given below: the first uses the new SMI macro feature (located in the GPS Command group) and the second is the manual method. Italics denote the variation between the two methods.

Setup Multiple Rovers (Macro)

1. Follow the normal GPS setup procedures to set up the base and first rover. 2. If the latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height of the base receiver are not known, press <GPS> <UTIL> <NeXT> <LBASE> on the data collector that set up the base. The latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height of the base receiver are shown in the display. 3. Use the <SKIP> soft key to see all of the numbers and write them down. Press <Esc> <Esc> to cancel when done. SMI Flex GPS Users: If using the internal SSR radios and the network ID of the base internal radio is not known, connect a data collector to the base and press a <Esc> (JETT a J key) to start the Instrument Functions menu. Tap <NETID> to see the current network ID and write it down. Press <Esc> <Esc> to exit without changing the network ID. 4. Execute the Setup Multiple Rovers command (in the GPS Command Group). 5. Key in 1 and press !. 6. If the point number of the base is in the job, type it in and press !. If the point is not stored in the job, type in 0 and press ! (if in State Plane mode).

272

SMI Version 8 User Guide

7. If you are prompted for LAT LONG HEIGHT, type in the latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height of the base separated by spaces and press !. The latitude and longitude should be entered in degrees minutes and seconds format.

123.1234567 represents 123 degrees, 12 minutes, and 34.567 seconds. Latitudes in the
southern hemisphere (below the equator) should be entered as negative numbers. Longitudes in the western hemisphere (which includes the Americas) should be entered as negative numbers. Change the sign of a number while the cursor is on the number by pressing a <+/-> (you do not need to press the a shift key when using the JETT). 8. Select the appropriate GPS instrument driver. For example, press <NCT> for the SMI Flex GPS system. 9. Tap <ROVER>. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios (see step 10). Otherwise if you tap <No> press a <Esc> (JETT a J key) to start the Instrument Functions menu. Tap <NETID>, type in the correct network ID, and press !. 10. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. 11. Press <POS> to see the Instrument Status screen. Wait for the displayed solution type to be Q5, which indicates fixed RTK mode. If Q5 has not been obtained after a few minutes, see Rover Not in Q5 RTK Fixed Mode in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual. 12. Complete any missing rover information like back azimuth and back point. Stake a known point to verify your setup. Your RTK GPS system is now ready to collect data.

Manual Method
1. Follow the normal GPS setup procedures to set up the base and first rover. 2. If the latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height of the base receiver are not known, press <GPS> <UTIL> <NeXT> <LBASE> on the data collector that set up the base. The latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height of the base receiver are shown in the display. 3. Use the <SKIP> soft key to see all of the numbers and write them down. Press <Esc> <Esc> to cancel when done. 273

SMI Flex GPS Users: If using the internal SSR radios and the network ID of the base internal radio is not known, connect a data collector to the base and press a <Esc> (JETT a J key) to start the Instrument Functions menu. Tap <NETID> to see the current network ID and write it down. Press <Esc> <Esc> to exit without changing the network ID. 4. Press <GPS> <INST> <NeXT> <MAN5> to get into manual GPS mode. In manual GPS mode, the data collector prompts for the latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height instead of getting it from the receiver. 5. Press <GPS> <OPT>, type 1, and tap <REPS>. There is no need to average measurements when in manual GPS mode. 6. Press <GPS> <BASE>. If the point number of the base is in the job, type it in and press !. If the point is not stored in the job, type in 0 and press !. 7. If you are prompted for LAT LONG HEIGHT, type in the latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height of the base separated by spaces and press !. The latitude and longitude should be entered in degrees minutes and seconds format.

123.1234567 represents 123 degrees, 12 minutes, and 34.567 seconds. Latitudes in the
southern hemisphere (below the equator) should be entered as negative numbers. Longitudes in the western hemisphere (which includes the Americas) should be entered as negative numbers. Change the sign of a number while the cursor is on the number by pressing a <+/-> . (you do not need to press the a shift key when using the JETT) 8. Press <GPS> <INST> and select the appropriate GPS instrument driver. For example, press <NCT> for the SMI Flex GPS system. 9. Tap <ROVER>. SMI Flex GPS Users: Answer the prompt about using external radios. If you tap <YES>, you are prompted for the baud rate of the external radios (see step 10). Otherwise if you tap <No>, press a <Esc> (JETT a J key) to start the Instrument Functions menu. Tap <NETID>, type in the correct network ID, and press !. 10. Key in the appropriate baud rate for your radio system and press !. 11. Press <POS> to see the Instrument Status screen. Wait for the displayed solution type to be Q5, which indicates fixed RTK mode. If Q5 has not been obtained after a few minutes, see Rover Not in Q5 RTK Fixed Mode in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual. 274

SMI Version 8 User Guide

12. Complete any missing rover information like back azimuth and back point. Stake a known point to verify your setup. Your RTK GPS system is now ready to collect data.

GPS Setup Using an Independent Receiver

Autonomous accuracy (rover only) varies greatly between GPS manufacturers. The table below shows some of the more common GPS receivers and their autonomous accuracies.

GPS Receivers and their Autonomous Accuracies

Model SMI Flex GPS (RT Models) SMI Flex GPS (SF Models) Ashtech Z Xtreme Sokkia Radian IS Leica SR530 Leica 1200 Topcon/Javad HiPer Lite+ Trimble 5800 Trimble 5700 Trimble Pathfinder Pro Autonomous Accuracy < 50 cm (WAAS) < 10 cm, < 2 cm for 10 minutes following QuickStart < 30 m < 30 m 5 10 m (WAAS) 1 3 m (WAAS) < 30 m, upgrade available to < 5 m (WAAS) < 5 m (WAAS) < 5 m (WAAS) 5 m (WAAS)

Scenario: Autonomous GPS accuracy is acceptable and you need to collect State Plane Coordinates and/or latitude and longitude. 1. Press <GPS> <OPT> to display the GPS Options screen. 2. Tap <SPCS>. The Select Coordinate System dialog box displays.

275

Figure 7-11 Select Coordinate System Dialog Box

3. Select your State Plane system and press ! or click OK. 4. Make sure the <SPC> / <LOCAL> soft key is set to <SPC> so that the job is in State Plane Coordinates mode instead of Local mode. The current mode is shown after the label PRJTN (Projection).

Figure 7-12 State Plane Coordinates Mode

5. Tap <REPS>, key in the desired number of measurements to average per shot, and press !. Averaging just five measurements generally increases the accuracy of the autonomous point collected. Key in 0 if you want to collect measurements until you decide enough have been averaged. 6. Press <GPS> <TOL> to display the GPS Tolerance screen. The highest quality a single (autonomous) receiver can usually get is 2 (Single Frequency WAAS). 7. Type 2 and press ! <QUAL> to set the quality tolerance to 2. ! GPS receivers without any correction source when in autonomous mode are Quality 1. ! The SMI Flex GPS system is capable of a Quality 3 (Dual Frequency WAAS) and an incredible Quality 4 RTG Dual Frequency, accurate to better than 4" after pull-in and better than 1" after QuickStart! 276

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Figure 7-13 GPS Quality Tolerances

8. Press <GPS> <BASE>. You are prompted for the base point. 9. Type 0 and press !. The collector gets the current position of the antenna and saves it to a point. Future shots will be shown in reference to this location. SMI Flex GPS Users: If using the SMI Flex GPS system with the StarFire option the receiver goes through an extra step called QuickStart where it pulls in its position to near RTK quality (1" RMS horizontal). This high level of precision will last for approximately 10 minutes after which time the position will never be worse than 4" RMS horizontal. 10. Tap <ROVER>. 11. Collect side shots by pressing <SIDS> (Allegro J key, Titan K key, JETT M key). State Plane Coordinates are saved to the coordinate file and raw data file. Latitude and longitude values for the point are also saved in the raw data file. The inverse shown on the screen after a side shot is taken from where you tapped the <BASE>. ! You will not see the Averaging Measurements screen if you set REPS to 1.

Figure 7-14 Averaging Measurements

12. To view the raw data file, press <VIEW> (the C key, JETT V key) <RAW>. The last record collected is shown.

277

Figure 7-15 View Side Shots Screen

! See Raw Data Generated by GPS Routines on page 309 for more information on how to read the raw GPS data. ! Change your side shot display to Coordinates if the reference to your base point in not important. Press <CHG> (the B key, JETT W key) <NeXT> <DSPLY> and repeatedly tap the first soft key until it reads <COOR>.

SMI Flex GPS WAAS Offset

The WAAS system provides corrections in a different datum than that of the typical NAD 83 values. WAAS uses reference frame of ITRF 94 (1996.0). To set up the WAAS ITRF 94 (EPOCH 1996.0) offset for your area follow the steps below. # Setting up the WAAS ITRF 94 offset requires an internet connection.

Figure 7-16 SMI Flex Offsets Dialog Box

! When working with an autonomous solution remember to key in a height of rod using the <H ROD> command, otherwise your elevations will be off by the amount of your antenna height. For SMI Flex GPS users, this value is either 1.7 m or 2.0 m depending on your pole solution.

278

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Below is the approximate change rates for these deltas with additional degree of latitude and longitude (160-mile diameter centered around the original delta calculation): X = Approximately 2 mm Y = Approximately 2 cm Z = Approximately 4 cm These values are all well within the accuracy of a WAAS-based solution, which for the SMI Flex GPS system is an impressive 50 cm RMS Horizontal. 1. Open an Internet Explorer window and key in www.ngs.noaa.gov/cgibin/HTDP/htdp.prl?f1=4&f2=1

Figure 7-17 HTDP Web Page

2. Select the input reference frame for your known latitude and longitude values (e.g., NAD_83 (CORS96)). 3. Select the output reference frame of ITRF94 (ITRF96 will be used, near the bottom).

279

This is the reference frame that all the SMI Flex GPS units work in while they are reporting a WAAS-type solution. 4. Key in the date that the known latitude and longitude were calculated, and use the same date for the output position. ! Dates must be expressed as a numerical month (between 1 and 12), a numerical day of the month, and a four character numerical year. The month, day, and year may be separated by spaces or by commas. For example, key in 5,4,2002 for May 4, 2002. 5. Key in the known latitude (positive north). 6. Key in the known longitude (positive west). ! Use degrees, minutes, and seconds and use spaces to separate the individual values. The field for seconds must include a decimal point. For example 89 56 12.34567. An easy way to determine your current latitude and longitude is to press <GPS> (the Z key), tap <Util> <POS>. This command will place the current Latitude and Longitude and Ellipsoidal Height on the Stack. 7. Key in the known ellipsoidal height. ! Values for ellipsoidal height must be specified in meters and must be entered with a decimal point (but without commas). 8. Click on Submit Query. The results page displays.

Figure 7-18 HTDP Results Page

280

SMI Version 8 User Guide

You will now subtract the Output Latitude & Longitude decimal seconds and Ellipsoidal Height from those of the Input Coordinates and enter those values in to the data collector under File > Settings > SMI Flex GPS. Using the example above you would calculate the deltas as follows: WAAS Latitude Delta = 47.18709 - 47.21142 = -0.02433 WAAS Longitude Delta = -46.00051 - -46.02578 = 0.02527 WAAS Ellipsoidal Height = 73.455 - 72.231 = 1.224 # West Longitudes are reported as positive values by the NGS, but are used/reported as standard longitude values expressed as negative values by SMI Flex GPS. So in the example above, the 89 36 46.00051 should be worked within SMI Flex GPS as -89 36 46.00051.

9. Select File > Settings > SMI Flex GPS and key in the following deltas: WAAS Latitude (ss.sssss): -0.02433 WAAS Longitude (ss.sssss): 0.02527 WAAS Ellipsoidal Height (m): 1.224

SMI Flex StarFire ITRF2000 Current EPOCH Offset

To set up the ITRF2000 Current EPOCH offset for your area, follow the steps below.

Figure 7-19 SMI Flex Offsets Dialog Box

! When working with an autonomous solution remember to key in a height of rod using the <H ROD> command, otherwise your elevations will be off by the amount of your antenna height. For SMI Flex GPS users, this value is either 1.7 m or 2.0 m depending on your pole solution.

281

Below is the approximate change rates for these deltas with an additional degree of latitude and longitude and one year of time (160-mile diameter centered around the original delta calculation): X = Approximately 3 mm Y = Approximately 1.7 cm Z = Approximately 4.2 cm These values are all within the accuracy of a RTG autonomous solution, which for the SMI Flex GPS StarFire system is an impressive 10 cm RMS Horizontal. These values will be greater in areas of the world that are experiencing faster velocities. For example, Southern California and Australia.

Example 1
1. Create a two hour static log and submit it to OPUS. See Collecting Static Data on page 293 and Submitting RINEX Files to OPUS on page 299. NGS OPUS SOLUTION REPORT ======================== # FIXED AMB:

ANT NAME: NAVRT3010S 42 / 45 : 93% ARP HEIGHT: 1.556 OVERALL RMS: 0.019(m) REF FRAME: NAD83(CORS96)(EPOCH:2002.0000) ITRF00 (EPOCH:2004.5509) X: 34499.091(m) 0.030(m) 34498.437(m) 0.030(m) Y: -5104621.656(m) 0.070(m) -5104620.240(m) 0.071(m) Z: 3811210.297(m) 0.026(m) 3811210.163(m) 0.026(m) LAT: 36 55 47.18709 0.021(m) 36 55 47.21130 0.022(m) E LON: 270 23 13.99949 0.030(m) 270 23 13.97345 0.030(m) W LON: 89 36 46.00051 0.030(m) 89 36 46.02655 0.030(m) EL HGT: 73.455(m) 0.072(m) 72.239(m) 0.072(m) ORTHO HGT: 101.710(m) 0.076(m) [Geoid03 NAVD88]

Figure 7-20 Example NGS OPUS Solution Report

282

SMI Version 8 User Guide

2. Using the report returned to you from OPUS, subtract the known latitude and longitude decimal seconds and ellipsoidal height of ITRF2000 Current EPOCH from those of WGS84 Original (NAD83 / CORS96) and enter those values in to the data collector. Using the example above you would calculate the deltas as follows: RTG Latitude Delta: 47.18709 - 47.21130 = -0.02421 RTG Longitude Delta: -46.00051 - -46.02655 = 0.02604 RTG Ellipsoidal Height: 73.455 - 72.239 = 1.216 # West Longitudes are reported as positive values by the NGS, but are used/reported as standard longitude values expressed as negative values by SMI Flex GPS. So in the example above, the 89 36 46.00051 should be worked within SMI Flex GPS as -89 36 46.00051.

3. Select File > Settings > SMI Flex GPS and key in the following deltas: RTG Latitude (ss.sssss): -0.02421 RTG Longitude (ss.sssss): 0.02604 RTG Ellipsoidal Height (m): 1.216

Example 2 (NGS Website)

1. Open an Internet Explorer window and key in www.ngs.noaa.gov/cgi-bin/HTDP/htdp.prl?f1=4&f2=1

283

Figure 7-21 HTDP Web Page

2. Select the input reference frame for your known latitude and longitude values (e.g., NAD_83 (CORS96)). 3. Select the output reference frame of ITRF00 (second from the bottom). This is the reference frame that the SMI Flex GPS StarFire units work in while they are reporting an RTG-type solution. 4. Key in the date that the known latitude and longitude were calculated. Dates must be expressed as a numerical month (between 1 and 12), a numerical day of the month, and a four character numerical year. The month, day, and year may be separated by spaces or by commas. For example key in 5,4,2002 for May 4, 2002. 5. Key in today's date (or future date of the planned work) using the same format as in step 4. 6. Key in the known latitude (positive north).

284

SMI Version 8 User Guide

7. Key in the known longitude (positive west). ! Use degrees, minutes, and seconds, and use spaces to separate the individual values. The field for seconds must include a decimal point. For example, 89 56 12.34567. An easy way to determine your current latitude and longitude is to press <GPS> , tap <Util> <POS>. This command will place the current Latitude and Longitude and Ellipsoidal Height on the Stack. 8. Key in the known ellipsoidal height. ! Values for ellipsoidal height must be specified in meters and must be entered with a decimal point (but without commas). 9. Click on Submit Query. The results page displays.

Figure 7-22 HTDP Results Page

You will now subtract the Output Latitude & Longitude decimal seconds and Ellipsoidal Height from those of the Input Coordinates and enter those values in to the data collector under File > Settings > Flex GPS. Using the example above, you would calculate the deltas as follows: RTG Latitude Delta: 47.18709 - 47.21131 = -0.02422 RTG Longitude Delta: -46.00051 - -46.02664 = 0.02613 RTG Ellipsoidal Height: 73.455 - 72.239 = 1.216

285

West Longitudes are reported as positive values by the NGS, but are used/reported as standard longitude values expressed as negative values by SMI Flex GPS. So in the example above, the 89 36 46.00051 should be worked within SMI Flex GPS as -89 36 46.00051.

10. Select File > Settings > SMI Flex GPS and key in the following deltas: RTG Latitude (ss.sssss): -0.02422 RTG Longitude (ss.sssss): 0.02613 RTG Ellipsoidal Height (m): 1.216

GPS Data Collection

Taking Side Shots
Occupy a point with the rover antenna and take a side shot by pressing <SIDS> (Allegro J key, Titan K key, JETT M key). If the position from the receiver is within the tolerances, the point will be stored. If one of the tolerances is exceeded, the data collector will beep and show the value that is bad. It will continue to try to collect the position and show the bad value until a good position is collected. See GPS Tolerances in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information. If the number of shots to be averaged is more than one, the GPS Average Shots screen displays the progress of the shots. The number of measurements to be averaged can be changed by pressing <GPS> <OPT> <rePS>. See Repetitions in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information.

Side Shot Offset

Scenario: You need to collect a point(s) that is not accessible by the GPS rover pole. 1. Put the rover on a point close to the desired location. 2. Press <SDA> (Allegro L key, Titan M key, JETT a Y key) to take a shot. 3. Type in a distance and tap the direction soft keys to indicate how far to offset the point.

286

SMI Version 8 User Guide

The Go/Come and Left/Right directions are in reference to the base.

Figure 7-23 Offset Point

4. After entering one or more offset distances, tap <STORE> to store the offset point.

Figure 7-24 Store Offset Point

! Other points can be stored in reference to the original shot by entering new directions and tapping <STORE> again. Each time <STORE> is tapped, a new point is created using the current offsets.

Real-time Side Shots

Real-time Side Shot stores a point whenever the rod moves farther than the minimum distance from the last shot taken. The current distance from the last stored point is displayed until a new point is stored. The default minimum distance is 10. To change the minimum distance, type it in before pressing <RSIDS> (the c 5 key, JETT c M key). Key in a negative distance to be prompted before storing the point (this gives you enough time to level the rod).

287

GPS Staking
Simple Point Staking
1. Press <STAKE> (Allegro O key, Titan P key, JETT S key) to display the Stake menu. 2. Type in the point number of the point to stake and tap <FSPT>. The direction and distance shown are from the base to the point. 3. Tap <SHOT> to cause the data collector to get a position from the receiver. If the position from the receiver is within the tolerances, the stakeout information is shown.

Figure 7-25 Stakeout Information

! If one of the tolerances is exceeded, the data collector beeps and shows the value that is bad. It continues to try to collect the position and shows the bad value until a good position is collected. See GPS Tolerances in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information. ! If the number of shots to be averaged is more than one, the GPS Average Shots screen shows the progress of the shots. The number of shots to be taken can be changed by pressing <GPS> <OPT> <REPS>. See Repetitions in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information. ! To see a live update of the staking information, press a <SHOT>. Again, the tolerances are checked to make sure the position is valid before displaying the results. The screen updates about every second. The GPS Average Shots screen is not used in this routine so the accuracy of the point is a single epoch position.

288

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Graphical Point Staking

This example shows how to use the Graphical Point Stakeout function to stake a stored point. Graphical Point Stakeout can also be used after tapping <FS> <CATCH> or <REFP> in the Construction menu to stake a station and offset, catch point, or reference point. In general, any calculated location can be found using Graphical Point Stakeout. 1. Press <STAKE> to display the Stake menu. 2. Type in the point number of the point to stake and tap <FSPT>. The direction and distance shown are from the base to the point. 3. Press <GSTK> (the Allegro _ key ) to display the Graphical Point Stakeout screen. The screen is updated at the rate to which the GPS receiver is set. Unlike other commands that apply tolerance values to the GPS data, the Graphical Point Stakeout screen shows all the data it gets from the receiver. Keep an eye on the Status field to make sure the quality does not get below the required value (typically 5 RTK fixed) and the H. Error.

Figure 7-26 Graphical Stakeout Screens (Far, Near, Stake)

4. Tap on Close when finished.

289

See Graphical Stakeout in the SMI Version 8 Reference Manual for more information.

Static Post Processing

RTK GPS methods can be used to create control points but a more accurate method is to use Static Post Processing. Static can be twice as accurate as RTK and also allows the use of multiple control points in network adjustments. The SMI Flex GPS receivers have the ability to log the raw GPS data to the 64 MB of internal memory onboard the receivers. This data can be loaded into desktop software and used to calculate the position of the receivers. Processing the raw GPS data files is called post processing. A single log file can be used to calculate a position, but to get accurate results, a known position should be logged at the same time as the unknown positions. Static and Kinematic are the two main types of post processing. Static post processing assumes the receivers are stationary while logging the data. Multiple sessions and multiple control points can be used to perform a network adjustment to minimize the errors. The accuracy increases with longer occupation times but a rule of thumb to obtain sub-centimeter accuracy is 5 minutes plus 30 seconds for every 1 km of separation from the base receiver logging data on a known point. If local control points are not available, GPS data from permanent base station networks such as CORS can be used. Since the permanent base stations are usually far away, the occupation times must be much longer (around 2 hours or more). Baseline 1 km 5 km 10 km 100 km* Minimum Occupation Time 6 minutes 8 minutes 10 minutes 120 minutes

* Baselines this long have decreased accuracy. In addition, baselines greater than 100 km are very typical of OPUS type processing. The minimum occupation time for an OPUS position is 1 hour. However, OPUS strongly recommends a 2 hour or greater observation time due to the extreme lengths of the base lines used in their solutions. Services such as OPUS allow log files to be uploaded; use the CORS permanent base stations to provide static post processed positions. Kinematic Post Processing does not assume that the receiver is stationary. It uses the same processing methods as Real Time Kinematic (RTK). Instead of using a radio to transmit the base station GPS data to the rover, the log files from the base and rover are post processed to calculate the position of the rover. It takes about 5 minutes of logging to get initialized and then a new position with centimeter accuracy is 290 SMI Version 8 User Guide

calculated every second. Please refer to Waypoint Softwares GrafNav manual for instructions on doing a Kinematic post process on SMI Flex GPS (NavCom) log files. ! Static is typically better than Kinematic for establishing control points.

Common Post Processing Terminology

Term Observation Station Definition A raw measurement log file collected from a receiver set up over a stationary point. A point over which the GPS receiver was set up. There might be multiple observation files for a single station. However, one set of position values will be produced for each station as a final product of post processing. There are several types of stations: Ground Control Point (GCP): A reference station with known latitude, longitude, and height coordinates. There must always be at least one control point per project. Check Point: A station with known coordinates, but these coordinates are only used as a check against computed coordinates. Tie Point: Such a point may also be called a loop tie closure, and is formed when two or more sessions "point" to it. Thus, there is a redundant determination at this point. Traverse Station: This is a point with no tie or control information. It may have two stations connected to it, but one is pointing to and one is pointing from. Session Concurrent period of time between two observation files at two different stations. One of the two stations is remote and the other one is the master. Each session is processed individually and combined in either a network adjustment or traverse solution. Connection between two stations with one or more sessions. Normally, a session and a baseline can be considered the same. However, in some cases there may be more than one session per baseline. This is called a duplicate session baseline. A reference station with known latitude, longitude, and height coordinates. There must always be at least one control point per project.

Baseline

Control Point

Closed Loop Network

A closed loop network, shown in the following figure, is often used by surveyors because of its increased reliability. Due to the closing of the loops, any baseline determination errors display as tie point error. If just two GPS receivers are employed, then a method called leapfrogging can be used to collect the data. In this procedure, starting from a known point, the lead receiver is placed on the first point to be surveyed. 291

After the first session is complete, the trailing receiver is moved ahead of the lead receiver so that it now becomes the lead. The next baseline is observed and this procedure is repeated until small (4-6) loops are closed. ! A new log file is started when the receiver is put on a point and stopped before removing the receiver from the point to move to the next point.

Figure 7-27 Closed Loop Network

Open Loop Network (Single Base Station)

The previous method (Closed Loop Networks), though reliable, can be tedious as it involves moving receivers around. Regardless, other applications such as GIS do not need this high degree of reliability and productivity is more important. For these situations, open loop networks might be used. The figure below shows an example of such a network. With this method, one receiver is left stationary and saving GPS data to a log file over a reference (control) point. One or more remote GPS receivers are moved from point to point, creating a new log file at each point. ! A new log file is started when the receiver is put on a point and stopped before removing the receiver from the point to move to the next point.

Figure 7-28 Open Loop Network

292 SMI Version 8 User Guide

Collecting Static Data

The steps below describe how to use the data collector to start and stop logging GPS data to the internal memory of the GPS receiver. The recommended occupation time depends on distance from base (baseline) and desired accuracy. A rule of thumb to obtain sub-centimeter accuracy is 5 minutes plus 30 seconds for every 1 km of separation. 1. Set the receiver on the point to be collected and connect the data collector. 2. Press <GPS> <NeXT> <LOG>. It may take up to 10 seconds to display the list of files. ! You can also select the GPS Static command key menu, which assigns the following commands to the command keys: GPS Receiver Logging (LOG), Start GPS Log on Receiver (START), Stop GPS Log on Receiver (STOP), Instrument Status (STAT/POS), and GPS Menu (GPS).

Figure 7-29 Closed Loop Network

3. Press the Start Log button to start the Start GPS Receiver Logging command. The Start GPS Logging dialog box displays.

Figure 7-30 Start GPS Logging Dialog Box

293

4. Key in a station name up to 4 characters long. 5. Use the Previous Occupations list box to indicate how many times data has already been logged on this station. This ensures a new file name is used to log the new session. 6. Use the Update Rate list box to change how often a Raw GPS data record is stored to the log file. 7. Press OK to start logging. The GPS log data is stored in files on the NavCom receiver. The log file name is based on the station name, previous occupations, and day of the year. It is always 8 characters long with a DAT extension. The format of the name is SSSSOJJJ.DAT where SSSS is the station name, O is the occupation number (0-9), and JJJ is the day of the year. The Start Log button changes to Stop Log when a log file is actively storing data. 8. Press the Stop Log button to stop logging. It is not necessary to stay in the GPS Receiver Logging screen to continue logging. In fact, the data collector can be disconnected from the receiver and be used to start logging on a different receiver. Logging will continue in the receiver until power is turned off or the Stop Log button is pressed on the data collector while connected to the receiver. It is recommended to use the Stop Log button before turning the receiver off. 9. Make a note of the rod height of the receiver if it is changed from the usual 2 meters The newer SMI Flex GPS rover pole and tripod pole has a 1.7 meter or 2.0 meter height option, carefully note the measurements, the older style SMI Flex GPS rover pole was fixed at 2.0 meters, and the SMI Flex GPS base tripod has height holes at 1.5, 1.7, 1.8, and 2.0 meters.

Changing Baud Rates

Prior to downloading the NavCom log files from the receiver, you may want to bump up the speed on the receiver to increase the speed of the download. 1. Connect the data collector to COM 2 on the receiver. 2. Press <GPS> <ROVER>. 3. When asked about using external radios, tap <YES>. 4. Key in 115200 for the baud rate.

294

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Downloading Static Log Files

1. Use the NavCom serial cable to connect COM 1 on the GPS receiver to an available computer COM port. 2. Turn on the receiver. 3. Run StarUtil.exe StarUtil.exe is included on the NavCom CD that comes with the receiver. A current version of StarUtil.exe can be found on your SMI Installation CD. 4. Select PC Port > Configure PC COM Port or press the 5. Make sure the correct PC COM port is selected. ! The computer automatically finds the baud rate for which the receiver is configured. See Changing Baud Rates on page 294 for an important time saving shortcut. This can also be accomplished using the Configure Receiver Ports command (Receiver > Setup > Ports) . 6. Select Tools > MMC Internal Data Logging. A list of the files displays on the receiver. It may take up to 12 seconds to display the complete list of log files (at 9600 Baud). 7. Select the files to download and press the Download button. 8. Select where on your PC to store the files. ! It is recommended to put all files for a project into a new subdirectory. ! It will take about 2 minutes per megabyte to transfer the files at 115,200 baud. icon.

Processing Static Data

There are several software packages that can post process GPS log files to create control points. Most of these packages can import RINEX format GPS log files. NavCom log files can be converted to RINEX format for use in these software packages. The following topics describe two ways to convert SMI Flex GPS (NavCom) log files to RINEX and two ways to post process the log files.

295

Converting Log Files To RINEX Using NavCom Utility

To convert SMI Flex GPS (NavCom) .dat files to the Receiver INdependent EXchange format (RINEX): 1. Copy the NavCom RINEX conversion utility from the Utilities directory on the SMI Installation CD to a folder on your computer. 2. Copy the NavCom .DAT log file to the same folder where you put the RINEX utility. 3. Start a DOS Command Prompt window. 4. Type RINEX

-i:filename

Note: Executable name may vary.

Where filename is the name of the log file to be converted. ! Do not include the .dat extension in the filename. 5. Press the Enter key. The RINEX utility creates three files with the same name as the log file: .03O, .LOG, and .03N files. ! It is not necessary to convert SMI Flex GPS (NavCom) log files to RINEX format if using Waypoint Softwares GrafNet or GrafNav software for post processing. See on page 306. ! The GrafNet and GrafNav programs process static files from nearly every GPS receiver ever built (capable of recording/outputting raw measurements), single frequency or dual frequency. There are also numerous other flags that can be used with this utility to produce specific results (to be used only for specialized processing needs):

RINEX -arg -arg -arg ...

Argument -i:input_file Use Name of measurement data file which contains measurements (x8b,x91,xb0), x81(packed ephemeris), solution (x85,xb1), and x83(iono_utc) blocks. Extension of input_file is assumed to be '.DAT' and should not be included. Maximum length of string is 40. If this arg is omitted then 'OG' is assumed as input file. Forces use of 0xb0 block, -i9: is 0x91, -i8: is 0x8b. If force character is omitted it uses first measurement block seen.

-ib

296

SMI Version 8 User Guide

-o:output_file

The name of created RINEX files. Extension of output_file should not be included. Extension is assumed to be '.yyO' and '.yyN' for RINEX observation file and ephemeris file respectively where 'yy' stands for the last two digits of the year. Maximum length of string is 40. If this arg is omitted then the same file name of input_file is assigned. If no x81 block found in input_file then only the RINEX observation file will be created. Note: -c1, -c2, -c3 args are effective only if all three args are specified. If some of these args are omitted and if at least one x86 block was found in the input_file then position in the first x86 block will be used.

-c1:sddmmss.ss

Latitude of the marker (not antenna) s: sign (+ or none for north hemisphere and - for south) dd: degrees, mm: minutes, and ss.ssssss: seconds. Example -c1:351240.12345 35 deg 12 min 40.12345 sec (N) Longitude of the marker (not antenna). s: sign (+ or none for east hemisphere and - for west) dd: degrees, mm: minutes, and ss.ssssss: seconds. Example -c1:-1181240.12345 118 deg 12 min 40.12345 sec (W) Height of the marker with xxx.xxx in meters. Antenna height above the marker with xxx.xxx in meters. If this arg is omitted, 0.0 is assumed. Modulo output interval with xx in seconds. If this arg is omitted then the measurements interval in the input_file is assigned. Output Start Time in GPS seconds in the Week. If this arg is omitted then data from the first measurements in the input_file will be output. (e.g., -ts:965.138990 start at week:965 tow:138990). Output Stop Time. If this arg is omitted, then data will be output up to the last measurements in the input_file. Forces to output only satellites for which ephemeris is available. If this arg is omitted then all satellites will be output regardless of availability of ephemeris. Forces to output Doppler measurements if available. If this arg is omitted then no Doppler will be output. Forces to output the time tags and all observables to be based on the receiver clock without adjustment [Receiver Time Frame]. Marker name. Maximum length of the string is 60. Forces all dates after Dec. 31, 1999 to replace the actual year with the year 1999. This is included for use with processing software that has Y2K bugs, but requires that all files processed use this flag. 297

-c2:sddmmss.ss

-c3:xxx.xxx -ah:xxx.xxx -w:xx -ts:WEEK.GPS_TOW

-te:WEEK.GPS_TOW -ep -dp -fr -mn:name -y2k

Example 1
RINEX -i:test -w:30
Creates RINEX files for the input_file 'TEST.DAT' with output data interval of 30 seconds. Uses first measurement block seen.

Example 2
RINEX -ib:test -w:30
Creates RINEX files for the input_file 'TEST.DAT' with output data interval of 30 seconds. Only uses 0xb0 measurement blocks

Converting Log Files To RINEX Using Waypoint

NavCom log files can be converted to RINEX using the Waypoint program prior to uploading them to OPUS. 1. Start GrafNet. 2. Select File > Convert > Raw GPS to GPB. This starts the Convert Raw GPS data to GPB screen. 3. Press the Get Folder button and select the folder where the NavCom data files are stored. See Downloading Static Log Files on page 295. 4. Press the Auto Add All button and then the Convert button. 5. Close the report screen and then close the convert screen. 6. Select File > Convert > GPB to RINEX. This starts the GPB to RINEX Converter screen. 7. Enter appropriate names into the Program Run By, Data Collected By, and Agency fields. 8. Click on the Add button and select the GPB file to be converted. 9. Enter the station name and antenna height. 10. Press OK. 11. Repeat steps 6 10 for every file to be converted.

298

SMI Version 8 User Guide

12. Press the Convert button after you have entered each file to be converted. Press the Quit button when the conversion process is complete.

Submitting RINEX Files to OPUS

1. Open a web browser and go to the OPUS web page http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/OPUS/

2. Enter your email address (Item #1). OPUS will email you the results. 3. Press the Browse button to select the file (Item #2). The files can be .ZIP'd to speed the transfer. 4. Select NAVRT3010S as the antenna type from the list (Item #3). ! There are a number of variations to the SMI Flex GPS system (airborne, backpack, pole mount, etc). If you are unsure about the exact antenna your system is equipped with, see SMI Flex Antenna Calibration Values on page 300.

299

5. Key in the antenna height in meters (Item # 4). Note: This is typically a nice even number (1.7 meters or 2.0 meters). You do not need to enter the L1 and L2 phase center information, this information has already been calculated by the NGS. 6. Click on Options (Item #5) and select the State Plane Zone from the list. 7. Press the Upload File button. ! The collection interval of the data file must be one of the allowed rates: 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 30 seconds. ! The time of each epoch is offset from one of the above intervals. The seconds epoch field must coincide with one of the prior rates. ! OPUS does not process kinematic data files (the receivers must be stationary during each logging session).

SMI Flex Antenna Calibration Values

For other antennas not listed below, visit the NGS Antenna Calibration website at: http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/ANTCAL/index.shtml for a complete listing. The tables of information below are in the following format:
ANTENNA ID DESCRIPTION [north] [ east] [ up ] [90] [85] [80] [75] [70] [40] [35] [30] [25] [20] [north] [ east] [ up ] [90] [85] [80] [75] [70] [40] [35] [30] [25] [20] DATA SOURCE (# OF TESTS) YR/MO/DY | L1 Offset (mm) [55] [50] [45] | L1 Phase at [ 5] [ 0] | Elevation (mm) | L2 Offset (mm) [55] [50] [45] | L2 Phase at [ 5] [ 0] | Elevation (mm)

[65] [15] [65] [15]

[60] [10] [60] [10]

300

SMI Version 8 User Guide

AN2004T Quad Feed Dipole

Typically used in SMI Flex Backpack solutions NAVAN2004T
.0 10.2

Quad Feed Dipole

NGS ( 3) 03/03/05
8.7 1.4 2.5 -6.1 9.4 .0 3.7 .0 9.9 .0 4.6 .0 10.2

-1.5 -.6 58.7 2.0 3.7 5.3 6.6 7.8 9.8 9.1 7.9 6.3 4.2 -3.3 -1.3 70.9 .0 -1.2 -1.5 -1.0 -.1 1.1 5.4 5.1 4.1 2.5 .3 -2.6 RMS mm (1 sigma) 3 MEASUREMENTS .5 .7 .5 .0 .1 .2 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .4 .4 .4 .2 .4 .6 .0 .1 .2 .2 .3 .3 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .5

5.3

.3 .3 .3 .5

.3 .0 .4 .0

.3 .0 .4 .0

.3

.3

301

302

SMI Version 8 User Guide

AN2008T Airborne Applications Dipole

Typically used with SMI Flex Vehicle and Aircraft Solutions NAVAN2008T
.0 7.7 .0 2.4 RMS mm .0 .7 .0 .2

Airborne Applications Dipole

5.8 3.1 3.0 3.4 6.6 1.1 3.1 4.8

NGS ( 3) 03/03/17
7.2 .0 3.1 .0 7.6 .0 2.9 .0 7.7

.8 .5 29.6 1.4 2.6 3.9 4.9 7.3 6.7 5.9 4.6 .3 -.4 33.8 .8 1.6 2.2 2.7 2.2 2.0 2.1 2.5 (1 sigma) 3 MEASUREMENTS .5 .3 .4 .4 .6 .7 .8 .7 .8 .8 .9 .2 .1 1.3 .2 .2 .2 .1 .2 .2 .2 .1

2.7

.7 .9 .1 .1

.7 .9 .2 .5

.7 .0 .2 .0

.7 .0 .2 .0

.7

.2

303

SF2040G GIS Sensor

NAVSF2040G
.0 7.6 .0 4.0 RMS mm .0 .8 .0 .5

GIS Sensor Antenna + Receiver NGS ( 3) 03/03/05

5.9 2.8 4.7 4.1 6.4 .2 4.8 5.0 6.9 .0 4.7 .0 7.3 .0 4.6 .0 7.5

1.3 2.5 132.7 1.7 3.1 4.2 5.1 7.4 7.0 6.1 4.8 -.7 -3.5 124.0 1.6 2.8 3.7 4.3 3.7 3.5 3.4 3.6 (1 sigma) 3 MEASUREMENTS 1.1 .4 1.8 .2 .4 .4 .5 .8 .7 .7 .6 .6 .7 .4 .2 .4 .4 .5 .5 .6 .6 .6

4.3

.5 .5 .5 .6

.6 .5 .5 .6

.6 .0 .5 .0

.7 .0 .5 .0

.8

.5

304

SMI Version 8 User Guide

RT3010S RTK GPS

NAVRT3010S
.2 .0 7.1

RTK GPS Antenna + Receiver NGS ( 3) 03/03/05

4.8 1.9 2.3 2.6 5.6 -.3 2.5 4.2 6.3 .0 2.4 .0 6.9 .0 2.4 .0 7.1

2.9 132.1 .9 1.8 2.8 3.9 6.8 6.1 5.1 3.7 -1.4 -3.5 124.2 .0 .4 1.0 1.5 2.0 1.7 1.4 1.2 1.2 1.6 RMS mm (1 sigma) 3 MEASUREMENTS 1.4 .7 .6 .0 .7 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.5 1.5 .2 2.3 1.0 .0 .7 1.1 1.4 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.3

2.1

1.8 1.5 1.5 1.1

1.8 1.4 1.4 .7

1.8 .0 1.4 .0

1.8 .0 1.3 .0

1.7

1.3

305

SMI Choke Ring

Typically used in Urban Non-Public Safety Grade SMI Base Stations and Static SMI Flex Backpack Surveys AERAT2775_43
2.3 .0 4.0 .0 -1.7 RMS mm .0 .1 .0 1.1

Choke Ring Geodetic L1/L2

3.4 1.3 -1.3 1.8

NGS ( 3) 01/05/09
3.8 .0 -1.4 .0 4.1 .0 -1.4 .0 4.2

-.6 88.3 .1 .6 1.3 2.0 2.7 3.7 3.2 2.6 2.1 1.6 -.2 .2 94.1 -.7 -1.0 -1.2 -1.3 -1.3 -1.7 -1.7 -1.4 -.8 .3 (1 sigma) 3 MEASUREMENTS .5 .4 .5 .1 .2 .2 .2 .2 .1 .2 .2 .2 .2 .6 .2 .7 .4 .6 .8 .9 .9 1.1 1.1 1.0 .8 .6

-1.6

.2 .3 1.0 .2

.1 .0 1.0 .0

.1 .0 1.0 .0

.1

1.1

Note: Use of the Radome changes the calibration values. Contact SMI for NGS values with Radome.

306

SMI Version 8 User Guide

Processing Using GrafNet

GrafNet is a program made by Waypoint Consulting that can do networked static post processing. Install it using the instructions in the Waypoint manual. The steps below describe how to generate networkadjusted control points using NavCom log files. These instructions assume that you have already downloaded the NavCom log files into a directory on your computer. First, add a new project. 1. Select File > New Project. 2. Browse to the same folder where you put the NavCom .data files. 3. Give the project a name and click Save. Now, convert NavCom .DAT files to Waypoint .GPB files 4. Select File > Convert > Raw GPS to GPB. 5. Press the Get Folder button and select the folder where the NavCom data files are stored. 6. Press the Auto Add All button. 7. Press the Convert button. 8. Close the report screen and then close the convert screen. Now, add the log files to your project. The first time you add observations, you should follow these steps. 9. Add NavCom antenna to list of antennae by pressing the Define button and then the Add Empty button. 10. Enter NavCom #ModelNumber# for the Name, 129mm for the Center to Ground plane edge, 132mm for L1 phase center, and 124mm for L2. Follow the steps below for adding subsequent observations. 11. Select File > Add/Remove Observations. 12. Press the Add All button. 13. Change the station ID to be just the first 4 characters of the file name shown in the top line of the window. 307

The station name should be changed to a number if you plan to use the stations as numbered points, such as would be required in an SMI data collector. 14. Enter the antenna height measurement. 15. Select Antenna profile from the combo box. 16. Click on the Close button after editing any mistakes. Now, identify the first control point. 17. Select File > Add/Remove Control Points. 18. Press the Add button. 19. Select the ID of the point on which you have control information in the Station Name combo box. The estimated GPS position is inserted into the position fields. 20. Correct the estimated position by typing in the known position. The position can be calculated from grid coordinates by pressing the Enter Grid Coordinates button. The Geoid needs to be identified if entering a mean sea level (orthometric) height instead of ellipsoidal height. The position can be saved for later use by pressing the Add to Favorites button. Positions already saved can be retrieved from the Select from Favorites button. 21. Save the project by selecting File > Save Project. Now, process all sessions 22. Select Process > Re-Process All Sessions. Successful baselines are shown in green, while duplicate baselines are shown in yellow. Other colors show a problem of some type. 23. Select Process > View All Sessions. Successful sessions are shown with a green checkmark. Sessions with problems can be reprocessed by pressing the Process button after you have changed the settings using the Options button. See Section 3.8 of the Waypoint GrafNet manual for tips on fixing a bad baseline. You will now identify other control points. 24. Now that GPS errors have been taken care of, the other control points can be added using File > Add/Remove Control Points. 25. Select Process > Re-Process All Sessions and then Process > View All Sessions to see the results. 308 SMI Version 8 User Guide

Perform a network adjustment. 26. Select Process > Network Adjustment and press the Process button. 27. Press the View Solution button to see the results. Last, export the coordinates. 28. Select Output > Write Coordinates to start the Write Coordinates screen. 29. Enter the path and file name to save to. 30. Select the output format as CSV (comma separated). 31. Set other options as needed and press OK.

Raw Data Generated by GPS Routines

When Raw Data is turn on, measurements from the receiver are stored in the raw data file. The raw data records related to GPS are shown below.

Position
CM GPS Latitude Longitude Altitude HeightRod SPCSadj Geoid VertError HorzError Satellites VDOP HDOP Quality

Average Position
CM GPS lat long alt Hrod SPCS adj Geoid VertError HorzError Satellites VDOP HDOP Quality VertError HorzError Satellites VDOP HDOP Quality

...

Set Base Position

CM BASE Latitude Longitude Altitude HeightBase SPCSadj Geoid VertError HorzError Satellites VDOP HDOP Quality

309

Position Using NMEA LLQ and NMEA PJK

CM GPS North East Elevation HeightRod SPCSadj Geoid Satellites CoordinateQuality ! SPCSadj is how much the state plane elevations are adjusted based on a benchmark done in State Plane mode. When using a local coordinate system, this value is zero.

310

SMI Version 8 User Guide